[Code of Federal Regulations]
[Title 10, Volume 3]
[Revised as of January 1, 2004]
From the U.S. Government Printing Office via GPO Access
[CITE: 10CFR430.27]
[Page 126-266]
TITLE 10--ENERGY
CHAPTER II--DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY
PART 430_ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAM FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS--Table of Contents
Subpart B_Test Procedures
Sec. 430.27 Petitions for waiver and applications for interim waiver.
(a)(1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a
particular basic model any requirements of Sec. 430.23, or of any
appendix to this subpart, upon the grounds that the basic model contains
one or more design characteristics which either prevent testing of the
basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or the
prescribed test procedures may evaluate the basic model in a manner so
unrepresentative of its true energy consumption characteristics, or
water consumption characteristics (in the case of faucets, showerheads,
water closets, and urinals) as to provide materially inaccurate
comparative data.
(2) Any interested person who has submitted a Petition for Waiver as
provided in this subpart may also file an Application for Interim Waiver
of the applicable test procedure requirements.
(b)(1) A Petition for Waiver shall be submitted, in triplicate, to
the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, United
States Department of Energy. Each Petition for Waiver shall:
(i) Identify the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is
requested, the design characteristic(s) constituting the grounds for the
petition, and the specific requirements sought to be waived and shall
discuss in detail the need for the requested waiver;
(ii) Identify manufacturers of all other basic models marketed in
the United States and known to the petitioner to incorporate similar
design characteristic(s);
(iii) Include any alternate test procedures known to the petitioner
to evaluate in a manner representative of the energy consumption
characteristics, or water consumption characteristics (in the case of
faucets, showerheads, water closets, and urinals) of the basic model;
and
(iv) Be signed by the petitioner or by an authorized representative.
In accordance with the provisions set forth in 10 CFR 1004.11, any
request for confidential treatment of any information contained in a
Petition for Waiver or in supporting documentation must be accompanied
by a copy of the petition, application or supporting documentation from
which the information
[[Page 127]]
claimed to be confidential has been deleted. DOE shall publish in the
Federal Register the petition and supporting documents from which
confidential information, as determined by DOE, has been deleted in
accordance with 10 CFR 1004.11 and shall solicit comments, data and
information with respect to the determination of the petition. Any
person submitting written comments to DOE with the respect to a Petition
for Waiver shall also send a copy of such comments to the petitioner. In
accordance with paragraph (i) of this section, a petitioner may submit a
rebuttal statement to the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and
Renewable Energy.
(2) An Application for Interim Waiver shall be submitted in
triplicate, with the required three copies of the Petition for Waiver,
to the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy, U.S.
Department of Energy. Each Application for Interim Waiver shall
reference the Petition for Waiver by identifying the particular basic
model(s) for which a waiver and temporary exception are being sought.
Each Application for Interim Waiver shall demonstrate likely success of
the Petition for Waiver and shall address what economic hardship and/or
competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable
determination on the Application for Interim Waiver. Each Application
for Interim Waiver shall be signed by the applicant or by an authorized
representative.
(c)(1) Each petitioner, after filing a Petition for Waiver with DOE,
and after the Petition for Waiver has been published in the Federal
Register, shall, within five working days of such publication, notify in
writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units of the
same product type (as listed in section 322(a) of the Act) and shall
include in the notice a statement that DOE has published in the Federal
Register on a certain date the Petition for Waiver and supporting
documents from which confidential information, if any, as determined by
DOE, has been deleted in accordance with 10 CFR 1004.11. Each
petitioner, in complying with the requirements of this paragraph, shall
file with DOE a statement certifying the names and addresses of each
person to whom a notice of the Petition for Waiver has been sent.
(2) Each applicant for Interim Waiver, whether filing jointly with,
or subsequent to, a Petition for Waiver with DOE, shall concurrently
notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units
of the same product type (as listed in Section 322(a) of the Act) and
shall include in the notice a copy of the Petition for Waiver and a copy
of the Application for Interim Waiver. In complying with this section,
each applicant shall in the written notification include a statement
that the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy will
receive and consider timely written comments on the Application for
Interim Waiver. Each applicant, upon filing an Application for Interim
Waiver, shall in complying with the requirements of this paragraph
certify to DOE that a copy of these documents have been sent to all
known manufacturers of domestically marked units of the same product
type (as listed in section 322(a) of the Act). Such certification shall
include the names and addresses of such persons. Each applicant also
shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section
with respect to the petition for waiver.
(d) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to an
Application for Interim Waiver shall also send a copy of the comments to
the applicant.
(e) If administratively feasible, applicant shall be notified in
writing of the disposition of the Application for Interim Waiver within
15 business days of receipt of the application. Notice of DOE's
determination on the Application for Interim Waiver shall be published
in the Federal Register.
(f) The filing of an Application for Interim Waiver shall not
constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this
subpart, until an Interim Waiver has been granted.
(g) An Interim Waiver from test procedure requirements will be
granted by the Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy
if it is determined that the applicant will experience economic hardship
if the Application for Interim Waiver is denied, if
[[Page 128]]
it appears likely that the Petition for Waiver will be granted, and/or
the Assistant Secretary determines that it would be desirable for public
policy reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the
Petition for Waiver.
(h) An interim waiver will terminate 180 days after issuance or upon
the determination on the Petition for Waiver, whichever occurs first. An
interim waiver may be extended by DOE for 180 days. Notice of such
extension and/or any modification of the terms or duration of the
interim waiver shall be published in the Federal Register, and shall be
based on relevant information contained in the record and any comments
received subsequent to issuance of the interim waiver.
(i) Following publication of the Petition for Waiver in the Federal
Register, a petitioner may, within 10 working days of receipt of a copy
of any comments submitted in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this
section, submit a rebuttal statement to the Assistant Secretary for
Conservation and Renewable Energy. A petitioner may rebut more than one
response in a single rebuttal statement.
(j) The petitioner shall be notified in writing as soon as
practicable of the disposition of each Petition for Waiver. The
Assistant Secretary for Conservation and Renewable Energy shall issue a
decision on the petition as soon as is practicable following receipt and
review of the Petition for Waiver and other applicable documents,
including, but not limited to, comments and rebuttal statements.
(k) The filing of a Petition for Waiver shall not constitute grounds
for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart, until a waiver
or interim waiver has been granted.
(l) Waivers will be granted by the Assistant Secretary for
Conservation and Renewable Energy, if it is determined that the basic
model for which the waiver was requested contains a design
characteristic which either prevents testing of the basic model
according to the prescribed test procedures, or the prescribed test
procedures may evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative
of its true energy consumption characteristics, or water consumption
characteristics (in the case of faucets, showerheads, water closets, and
urinals) as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. Waivers
may be granted subject to conditions, which may include adherence to
alternate test procedures specified by the Assistant Secretary for
Conservation and Renewable Energy. The Assistant Secretary shall consult
with the Federal Trade Commission prior to granting any waiver, and
shall promptly publish in the Federal Register notice of each waiver
granted or denied, and any limiting conditions of each waiver granted.
(m) Within one year of the granting of any waiver, the Department of
Energy will publish in the Federal Register a notice of proposed
rulemaking to amend its regulations so as to eliminate any need for the
continuation of such waiver. As soon thereafter as practicable, the
Department of Energy will publish in the Federal Register a final rule.
Such waiver will terminate on the effective date of such final rule.
(n) In order to exhaust administrative remedies, any person
aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the
DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003,
subpart C.
[51 FR 42826, Nov. 26, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 15017, Mar. 21, 1995;
63 FR 13316, Mar. 18, 1998]
Appendix A1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Electric Refrigerators and Electric
Refrigerator-Freezers
1. Definitions
1.1 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance
Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination
refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an
American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970.
1.2 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the sum of (i) the fresh food
compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, and (ii) the
product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume
as defined in HRF-1-1979, in cubic feet.
1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the
design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the
accumulation of moisture on exterior surfaces of
[[Page 129]]
the cabinet under conditions of high ambient humidity.
1.4 ``All-refrigerator'' means an electric refrigerator which does
not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food
at temperatures below 32 [deg]F. (0.0 [deg]C.). It may include a
compartment of 0.50 cubic feet capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the
freezing and storage of ice.
1.5 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use
of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is
calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature
controls were set so that the desired compartment temperatures were
maintained.
1.6 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the
calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric
refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer
activated controls other than those that control compartment
temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.7 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat
heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming
position.
1.8 ``Automatic defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle
is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal
refrigeration at the conclusion of the defrost operation. The system
automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all
refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are
maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.9 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost
system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more
of compressor-operating time.
1.10 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during
which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.11 ``Variable defrost control'' means a long-time automatic
defrost system (except the 14-hour defrost qualification does not apply)
where successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition
variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This
includes any electrical or mechanical device. Demand defrost is a type
of variable defrost control.
1.12 ``Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer''
means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that:
has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor
compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air
from outside the building envelope into, through and out of the
refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing
exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out
of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; includes
thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that enable the mixing
of the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures, and the
exclusion of exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80
[deg]F or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically
actuated exterior air fan.
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Ambient temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 +- 1
[deg]F. (32.3+-0.6 [deg]C.) during the stabilization period and during
the test period. The ambient temperature shall be 80+-2 [deg]F dry bulb
and 67 [deg]F wet bulb during the stabilization period and during the
test period when the unit is tested in accordance with section 3.3.
2.2 Operational conditions. The electric refrigerator or electric
refrigerator-freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions
maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 7.2 through section
7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient temperature gradient at
locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of
the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the
area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be
maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform
to a height one foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost
controls are to be operative and the anti-sweat heater switch is to be
``on'' during one test and ``off'' during a second test. Other
exceptions are noted in 2.3, 2.4, and 5.1 below.
2.3 Conditions for automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers. For
automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall
not be loaded with any frozen food packages. Cylindrical metallic masses
of dimensions 1.12+-0.25 inches (2.9+-0.6 cm) in diameter and height
shall be attached in good thermal contact with each temperature sensor
within the refrigerated compartments. All temperature measuring sensor
masses shall be supported by nonthermally conductive supports in such a
manner that there will be at least one inch (2.5 cm) of air space
separating the thermal mass from contact with any surface. In case of
interference with hardware at the sensor locations specified in section
5.1, the sensors shall be placed at the nearest adjacent location such
that there will be a one inch air space separating the sensor mass from
the hardware.
2.4 Conditions for all-refrigerators. There shall be no load in the
freezer compartment during the test.
2.5 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the
temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at four
minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing
at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as
determined by the applicable condition of A or B.
[[Page 130]]
A. The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no
cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor
cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compare to the
average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between
the two measurement periods.
B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during
a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no
less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a
defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements
during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the
same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.
2.6 Exterior air for externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-
freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable
temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature
shall be adjustable from 35+-1 [deg]F (1.7+-0.6 [deg]C) to 90+-1 [deg]F
(32.2+-0.6 [deg]C).
2.6.1 Air duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air
source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
2.6.2 Air temperature measurement. The air temperature entering the
condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to +-3
[deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) during the stabilization and test periods and shall
be measured at the inlet point of the condenser or condenser/compressor
compartment (``condenser inlet''). Temperature measurements shall be
taken from at least three temperature sensors or one sensor per 4 square
inches of the air duct cross sectional area, whichever is greater, and
shall be averaged. For a unit that has a condenser air fan, a minimum of
three temperature sensors at the condenser fan discharge shall be
required. Temperature sensors shall be arranged to be at the centers of
equally divided cross sectional areas. The exterior air temperature, at
its source, shall be measured and maintained to +-1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C)
during the test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an
error not greater than +-0.5 [deg]F (+-0.3 [deg]C). Measurements of the
air temperature during the test period shall be taken at regular
intervals not to exceed four minutes.
2.6.3 Exterior air static pressure. The exterior air static pressure
at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative
pressure of 0.20''+-0.05'' water column (62 Pa+-12.5 Pa) for all air
flow rates supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on
a straight duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of
the duct upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the
duct downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at
90[deg]angles apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by
interconnecting the four pressure taps. The air pressure measuring
instrument shall have an error not greater than 0.01'' water column (2.5
Pa).
3. Test Control Settings
3.1 Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be
performed during which the compartment temperatures and energy use shall
be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature
control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run
continuously.
3.2 Model with user operable temperature control. Testing shall be
performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the
standardized temperatures of:
All-refrigerator: 38 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.) fresh food compartment
temperature
Refrigerator: 15 [deg]F. (-9.4 [deg]C.) freezer compartment temperature
Refrigerator-freezer: 5 [deg]F. (-15 [deg]C.) freezer compartment
temperature
Variable defrost control models: 5 [deg]F (-15 [deg]C) freezer
compartment temperature and 38 +-2 [deg]F fresh food compartment
temperature during steady-state conditions with no door-openings. If
both settings cannot be obtained, then test with the fresh food
compartment temperature at 38+-2 [deg]F and the freezer compartment as
close to 5 [deg]F as possible.
3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all compartment
temperature controls set at their median position midway between their
warmest and coldest settings. Knob detents shall be mechanically
defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. A second test shall be
performed with all controls set at either their warmest or their coldest
setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is
appropriate, to attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured
during the two tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below)
the standardized temperature for the type of product being tested. If
the compartment temperatures measured during these two tests bound the
appropriate standardized temperature, then these test results shall be
used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature
measured with all controls set at their coldest setting is above the
standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all
controls set at their warmest setting and the result of this test shall
be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at
their coldest setting to determine energy consumption. If the
compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest
setting is below the standardized temperature; and the fresh food
compartment temperature is below 45 [deg]F. (7.22 [deg]C.) in the case
of a refrigerator or a refrigerator-freezer, excluding an all-
refrigerator, then the result of this test alone will be used to
determine energy consumption.
[[Page 131]]
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all
temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment
temperature is below the appropriate standardized temperature, and the
fresh food compartment temperature is below 45 [deg]F. (7.22 [deg]C.) in
the case of a refrigerator or a refrigerator-freezer, excluding an all-
refrigerator, then the result of this test alone will be used to
determine energy consumption. If the above conditions are not met, then
the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all
temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment
temperature is above the appropriate standardized temperature, a second
test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest control
setting and the results of these two tests shall be used to determine
energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit
shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
3.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After a steady-state
condition is achieved, the optional test requires door-openings for 12+-
2 seconds every 60 minutes on the fresh food compartment door and a
simultaneous 12+-2 second freezer compartment door-opening occurring
every 4th time, to obtain 24 fresh food and six freezer compartment
door-openings per 24-hour period. The first freezer door-opening shall
be simultaneous with the fourth fresh food door-opening. The doors are
to be opened 60[deg] to 90[deg]with an average velocity for the leading
edge of the door of approximately 2 ft./sec. Prior to the initiation of
the door-opening sequence, the refrigerator defrost control mechanism
may be re-initiated in order to minimize the test duration.
4. Test Period
4.1 Test Period. Tests shall be performed by establishing the
conditions set forth in Section 2, and using control settings as set
forth in Section 3, above.
4.1.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no
automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady
state conditions have been achieved and be of not less than three hours
in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete
two or more whole compressor cycles (a compressor cycle is a complete
``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor). If no ``off''
cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the
test period shall be three hours. If incomplete cycling (less than two
compressor cycles) occurs during a 24 hour period, the results of the 24
hour period shall be used.
4.1.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic
defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady state
conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost
period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model
being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative
provisions of 4.1.2.1 may be used.If the model being tested has a
variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.1.2.2 or 4.1.2.3
shall apply. If the model has a dual compressor system the provisions of
4.1.2.4 shall apply.
4.1.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a
long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of
two parts. A first part would be the same as the test for a unit having
no defrost provisions (section 4.1.1). The second part would start when
a defrost is initiated when the compressor ``on'' cycle is terminated
prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn
``on'' of the compressor or four hours from the initiation of the
defrost heater, whichever comes first. See diagram in Figure 1 to this
section.
[[Page 132]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR03.019
4.1.2.2 Variable defrost control. If the model being tested has a
variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of three parts.
Two parts shall be the same as the test for long-time automatic defrost
(section 4.1.2.1). The third part is the optional test to determine the
time between defrosts (section 5.2.1.3). The third part is used by
manufacturers that choose not to accept the default value of F of 0.20,
to calculate CT.
4.1.2.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After steady-state
conditions with no door openings are achieved in accordance with section
3.3 above, the test is continued using the above daily door-opening
sequence until stabilized operation is achieved. Stabilization is
defined as a minimum of three consecutive defrost cycles with times
between defrosts that will allow the calculation of a Mean Time Between
Defrosts (MTBD1) that satisfies the statistical relationship of 90
percent confidence. The test is repeated on at least one more unit of
the model and until the Mean Time Between Defrosts for the multiple unit
tests (MTBD2) satisfies the statistical relationship. If the time
between defrosts is greater than 96 hours (compressor ``on'' time) and
this defrost period can be repeated on a second unit, the test may be
terminated at 96 hours (CT) and the absolute time value used for MTBD
for each unit.
4.1.2.4 Dual compressor systems with automatic defrost. If the model
being tested has separate compressor systems for the refrigerator and
freezer sections, each with its own automatic defrost system, then the
two-part method in 4.1.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method
will be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system. The
auxiliary components (fan motors, anti-sweat heaters, etc.) will be
identified for
[[Page 133]]
each system and the energy consumption measured during each test.
5. Test Measurements
5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made
at the locations prescribed in Figures 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 and
shall be accurate to within +- 0.5 [deg]F. (0.3 [deg]C.) of true value.
No freezer temperature measurements need be taken in an all-refrigerator
model.
If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with
those shown in Figure 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, measurements shall be
taken at selected locations chosen to represent approximately the entire
refrigerated compartment. The locations selected shall be a matter of
record.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a
compartment is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings
taken in that compartment at a particular time. Measurements shall be
taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each
test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a
compartment during a complete cycle or several complete cycles of the
compressor motor (one compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and
one complete motor ``off'' period). For long-time automatic defrost
models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first
part of the test period specified in 4.1.1. For models equipped with
variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those
measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.1.2.2
above.
5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which
the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to
determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of
minutes between measured temperature readings, rounded up to the next
whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding
one hour. One of the cycles shall be the last complete compressor motor
cycle during the test period.
5.1.2.2 If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment
temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken
during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3 If incomplete cycling occurs, the compartment temperatures
shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last
three hours of the last complete ``on'' period.
5.2 Energy Measurements
5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in
kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended
during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour
period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy
consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
ET=EPx1440/T
where
ET=test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day,
EP=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period,
T=length of time of the test period in minutes, and
1440=conversion factor to adjust to a 24 hour period in minutes per day.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is
used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be
calculated equivalent to:
ET=(1440xEP1/T1)+((EP2-(EP1xT2/T1))x12/CT)
where
ET and 1440 are defined in 5.2.1.1,
EP1=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test,
EP2=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test,
T1 and T2=length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively,
CT=Defrost timer run time in hours required to cause it to go through a
complete cycle, to the nearest tenth hour per cycle, and
12=factor to adjust for a 50% run time of the compressor in hours per
day.
5.2.1.3 Variable defrost control. The energy consumption in
kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
ET=(1440xEP1/T1)+(EP2-(EP1xT2/T1))x(12/CT) where 1440 is defined in
5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2 and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2.
CT=CTLxCTM)/(Fx(CTM-
CTL)+CTL)
CTL=least or shortest time between defrosts in tenths of an
hour (greater than or equal to six but less than or equal to 12 hours)
CTM=maximum time between defrost cycles in tenths of an hour
(greater than CTL but not more than 96 hours)
F=ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and
the maximum difference in per day energy consumption and is equal to
F = (1/CT - 1/CTM)/(1/CTL - 1/CTM =
(ET-ETL)/ETM - ETL) or 0.20 in lieu of
testing to find CT.
ETL = least electrical energy used (kilowatt hours)
ETM=maximum electrical energy used (kilowatt hours). For
demand defrost models with no values for CTL and
CTM in the algorithm the default values of 12 and 84 shall be
used, respectively.
[[Page 134]]
5.2.1.4 Optional test method for variable defrost controls.
CT = MTBDx0.5
where:
MTBD = mean time between defrosts
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.027
where:
X=in time between defrost cycles
N=number of defrost cycles
5.2.1.5 Dual compressor systems with dual automatic defrost. The
two-part test method in section 4.1.2.2 must be used, the energy
consumption in kilowatt per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
ET=(1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2F - (EPF x T2/T1)) x 12/
CTF + (EP2R - (EPR x T3/T1)) x 12/
CTR
Where 1440, EP1, T1, EP2, 12, and CT are defined in 5.2.1.2
EPF = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second
part of the test for the freezer system by the freezer system.
EP2F = total energy expended during the second part of the
test for the freezer system.
EPR = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second
part of the test for the refrigerator system by the refrigerator system.
EP2R = total energy expended during the second part of the
test for the refrigerator system.
T2 and T3 = length of time in minutes of the second test part for the
freezer and refrigerator systems respectively.
CTF = compressor ``on'' time between freezer defrosts (tenths
of an hour).
CTR = compressor ``on'' time between refrigerator defrosts
(tenths of an hour).
5.3 Volume measurements. The electric refrigerator or electric
refrigerator-freezer total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in
accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and sections 4.2 through 4.3
and be calculated equivalent to:
VT=VF+VFF
where
VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet,
VF=freezer compartment volume in cubic feet, and
VFF=fresh food compartment volume in cubic feet.
5.4 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer units.
All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or
refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements
of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section
5.4 or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented
refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
5.4.1 Operability of thermostatic and mixing of air controls. Prior
to conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic
controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when
exterior air temperatures are less than 60 [deg]F must be verified. The
operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit
under ambient air temperature of 90 [deg]F and exterior air temperature
of 45 [deg]F. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/
compressor compartment is maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus three
degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall be measured under 5.4.2.2
and 5.4.2.3. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/
compressor compartment is not maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus
three degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall also be measured
under 5.4.2.4.
5.4.2 Energy consumption tests.
5.4.2.1 Correction factor test. To enable calculation of a
correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure
energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the
condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) and 80
[deg]F (26.7 [deg]C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment
temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest
and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the
energy consumptions ec90 and ec80, in kWh/day.
5.4.2.2 Energy consumption at 90 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at
90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy
consumptions (e90)i in kWh/day. For a given
setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two
states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.3 Energy consumption at 60 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at
60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy
consumptions (e60)i in kWh/day. For a given
setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two
states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.4 Energy consumption if mixing controls do not operate
properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not
been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50
[deg]F (10.0 [deg]C) and 30 [deg]F (-1.1 [deg]C) exterior air
temperatures to record the energy consumptions
(e50)i and (e30)i. For a
given setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two
states of the compartment temperature control positions.
6. Calculation of Derived Results from Test Measurements
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume.
6.1.1 Electric refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for
electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as:
VA=(VFxCR)+VFF
[[Page 135]]
where
VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,
VF and VFF are defined in 5.3, and
CR=adjustment factor of 1.44 for refrigerators other than all-
refrigerators, or 1.0 for all-refrigerators, dimensionless,
6.1.2 Electric refrigerator-freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA,
for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as
follows:
VA=(VFxCRF)+VFF
where
VF and VFF are defined in 5.3 and VA is defined in 6.1.1,
CRF=adjustment factor of 1.63, dimensionless,
6.2 Average Per-Cycle Energy consumption.
6.2.1 All-refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy
consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to
the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the
temperature attainable in the fresh food compartment as shown below.
6.2.1.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below
38.0 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption
shall be equivalent to:
E=ET1
where
E=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day,
ET is defined in 5.2.1, and Number 1 indicates the test period during
which the highest fresh food compartment temperature is measured.
6.2.1.2 If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured
for a test period is greater than 38.0 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.), the
average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(38.0-TR1)/(TR2-TR1))
where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1,
TR=Fresh food compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in
degrees F,
Number 1 and 2 indicates measurements taken during the first and second
test period as appropriate, and
38.0=Standardized fresh food compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.2.2 Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. The average per-cycle
energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per-
cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be
defined in the applicable following manner.
6.2.2.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always at or
below 45 [deg]F. (7.2 [deg]C.) in both of the tests and the freezer
compartment temperature is always at or below 15 [deg]F. (-9.4 [deg]C.)
in both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 5 [deg]F. (-15 [deg]C.)
in both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the per-cycle energy
consumption shall be:
E=ET1
where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1, and
Number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest freezer
compartment temperature was measured.
6.2.2.2 If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the per-cycle
energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values
calculated by the following two formulas:
E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(45.0-TR1)/(TR2-TR1))
and
E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(k-TF1)/(TF2-TF1))
where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1,
ET is defined in 5.2.1,
TR and number 1 and 2 are defined in 6.2.1.2,
TF=Freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in
degrees F,
45.0 is a specified fresh food compartment temperature in degree F, and
k is a constant 15.0 for refrigerators or 5.0 for refrigerator-freezers
each being standardized freezer compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.3 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-
cycle energy consumption measurements for the externally vented
refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance
with the requirements of this Appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-
6.3.7.
6.3.1 Correction factor. A correction factor, K, shall be calculated
as:
K = ec90/ec80
where ec90 and ec80 = the energy consumption test
results as determined under 5.4.2.1.
6.3.2 Combining test results of different settings of compartment
temperature controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater,
follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for
energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings
for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3,
and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e90)i,
(e60)i, (e50)i, and
(e30)i. The combined values are
[epsi]90, [epsi]60, [epsi]50, and
[epsi]30, where applicable, in kWh/day.
6.3.3 Energy consumption corrections. For a given setting of the
anti-sweat heater, the energy consumptions [epsi]90,
[epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30
calculated in 6.3.2 shall be adjusted by multiplying the correction
factor K to obtain the
[[Page 136]]
corrected energy consumptions per day, in kWh/day:
E90 = K x [epsi]90,
E60 = K x [epsi]60
E50 = K x [epsi]50, and
E30 = K x [epsi]30
where,
K is determined under section 6.3.1, and [epsi]90,
[epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30 are
determined under section 6.3.2.
6.3.4 Energy profile equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat
heater, the energy consumption EX, in kWh/day, at a specific
exterior air temperature between 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) and 60 [deg]F
(26.7 [deg]C) shall be calculated by the following equation:
EX = a + bTX,
where,
TX = exterior air temperature in [deg]F;
a = 3E60-2E90, in kWh/day;
b = (E90-E60)/30, in kWh/day per [deg]F.
6.3.5 Energy consumption at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9
[deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C). For a given setting of the anti-
sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 [deg]F (26.7
[deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) exterior
air temperatures, E80, E75 and E65,
respectively, in kWh/day, using the equation in 6.3.4.
6.3.6 National average per cycle energy consumption. For a given
setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the national average energy
consumption, EN, in kWh/day, using one of the following
equations:
EN = 0.523 x E60 + 0.165 x E65 + 0.181
x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for units not tested under
5.4.2.4,
EN = 0.257 x E30 + 0.266 x E50 + 0.165
x E65 + 0.181 x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for
units tested under 5.4.2.4,
where,
E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,
E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5,
and
the coefficients are weather associated weighting factors.
6.3.7 Regional average per cycle energy consumption. If regional
average per cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated, for a
given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average
per cycle energy consumption, ER, in kWh/day, for the regions
in figure 1 using one of the following equations and the coefficients in
the table A:
ER = a1 x E60 + c x E65 + d
x E75 + e x E80, for a unit that is not required
to be tested under 5.4.2.4,
ER = a x E30 + b x E50 + c x
E65 + d x E75 + e x E80, for a unit
tested under 5.4.2.4,
where:
E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,
E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5,
and
a1, a, b, c, d, e are weather associated weighting factors
for the Regions, as specified in Table A:
Table A--Coefficients for Calculating Regional Average per Cycle Energy Consumption
[Weighting Factors]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regions a1 a b c d e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I......................................................... 0.282 0.039 0.244 0.194 0.326 0.198
II........................................................ 0.486 0.194 0.293 0.191 0.193 0.129
III....................................................... 0.584 0.302 0.282 0.178 0.159 0.079
IV........................................................ 0.664 0.420 0.244 0.161 0.121 0.055
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 137]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09SE97.000
[47 FR 34526, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at
54 FR 36240, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989; 62 FR 47539,
47540, Sept. 9, 1997; 68 FR 10960, Mar. 7, 2003]
Appendix B1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Freezers
1. Definitions.
1.1 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance
Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination
refrigerators-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an
American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B38.1-1970.
1.2 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the
design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior
surfaces of the cabinet under conditions of high ambient humidity.
1.3 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use
of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment
temperature controls were preset so that the desired compartment
temperatures were maintained.
1.4 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the
calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with
the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature
control set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.5 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat
heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming
position.
1.6 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the product of, (1) the freezer
volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, times (2) an adjustment
factor.
1.7 ``Automatic Defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle
is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal
refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system
automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all
refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are
maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.8 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost
system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more
of compressor-operating time.
1.9 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during
which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.10 ``Variable defrost control'' means a long-time automatic
defrost system (except the 14-hour defrost qualification does not
[[Page 138]]
apply) where successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating
condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating
time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device. Demand defrost
is a type of variable defrost control.
1.11 ``Quick freeze'' means an optional feature on freezers which is
initiated manually and shut off manually. It bypasses the thermostat
control and places the compressor in a steady-state operating condition
until it is shut off.
2. Test Conditions.
2.1 Ambient temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0+-1.0
[deg]F. (32.2+-0.6 [deg]C.) during the stabilization period and during
the test period. The ambient temperature shall be 80+-2 [deg]F dry bulb
and 67 [deg]F wet bulb during the stabilization period and during the
test period when the unit is tested in accordance with section 3.3.
2.2 Operational conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its
operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section
7.2 through section 7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient gradient
at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the the centers of the two
sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test.
Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to
be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting
platform to a height one foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test.
Defrost controls are to be operative and the anti-sweat heater switch is
to be ``on'' during one test and ``off'' during a second test. The quick
freeze option shall be switched off unless specified.
2.3 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the
temperature measurements taken at four minute intervals or less during a
stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042
[deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as determined by the applicable
condition of A or B.
A--The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no
cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor
cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compared to the
average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between
the two measurement periods.
B--If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a
number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no
less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a
defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements
during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the
same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.
3. Test Control Settings.
3.1 Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be
performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall
be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature
control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run
continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, it is to be used
to bypass the temperature control.
3.2 Model with user operable temperature control. Testing shall be
performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the
standardized temperature of 0.0 [deg]F. (-17.8 [deg]C.). Variable
defrost control models shall achieve 0+-2 [deg]F during the steady-state
conditions prior to the optional test with no door openings.
3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all temperature controls
set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest
settings. Knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to
attain a median setting. A second test shall be performed with all
controls set at either their warmest or their coldest setting (not
electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is appropriate, to
attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two
tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized
temperature. If the compartment temperatures measured during these two
tests bound the standardized temperature, then these test results shall
be used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature
measured with all controls set at their coldest setting is above the
standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all
controls set at their warmest setting and the result of this test shall
be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at
their coldest setting to determine energy consumption. If the
compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest
setting is below the standardized temperature; then the result of this
test alone will be used to determine energy consumption.
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all
temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment
temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of
this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If the
above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance
with 3.2.1 above.
3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all
temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment
temperature is above the standardized temperature, a second test shall
be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting and the
results of these two tests shall be used to determine energy
consumption. If
[[Page 139]]
the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in
accordance with 3.2.1 above.
3.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After a steady-state
condition is achieved, the door-opening sequence is initiated with an
18+-2 second freezer door-opening occurring every eight hours to obtain
three door-openings per 24-hour period. The first freezer door-opening
shall occur at the initiation of the test period. The door(s) are to be
opened 60 to 90[deg]with an average velocity for the leading edge of the
door of approximately two feet per second. Prior to the initiation of
the door-opening sequence, the freezer defrost control mechanism may be
re-initiated in order to minimize the test duration.
4. Test Period.
4.1 Test Period. Tests shall be performed by establishing the
conditions set forth in Section 2 and using control settings as set
forth in Section 3 above.
4.1.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no
automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady
state conditions have been achieved, and be of not less than three
hours' duration. During the test period the compressor motor shall
complete two or more whole cycles (a compressor cycle is a complete
``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor). If no ``off''
cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the
test period shall be three hours. If incomplete cycling (less than two
compressor cycles) occurs during a 24 hour period, the results of the 24
hour period shall be used.
4.1.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic
defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady state
conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost
period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model
being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate
provisions of 4.1.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a
variable defrost control the provisions of 4.1.2.2. shall apply.
4.1.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a
long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of
two parts. A first part would be the same as the test for a unit having
no defrost provisions (section 4.1.1). The second part would start when
a defrost period is initiated during a compressor ``on'' cycle and
terminate at the second turn ``on'' of the compressor motor or after
four hours, whichever comes first.
4.1.2.2 Variable defrost control. If the model being tested has a
variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of three parts.
Two parts shall be the same as the test for long-time automatic defrost
in accordance with section 4.1.2.1 above. The third part is the optional
test to determine the time between defrosts (5.2.1.3). The third part is
used by manufacturers that choose not to accept the default value of F
of 0.20, to calculate CT.
4.1.2.3 Variable defrost control optional test. After steady-state
conditions with no door-openings are achieved in accordance with section
3.3 above, the test is continued using the above daily door-opening
sequence until stabilized operation is achieved. Stabilization is
defined as a minimum of three consecutive defrost cycles with times
between defrost that will allow the calculation of a Mean Time Between
Defrosts (MTBD1) that satisfies the statistical relationship of 90
percent confidence. The test is repeated on at least one more unit of
the model and until the Mean Time Between Defrosts for the multiple unit
test (MTBD2) satisfies the statistical relationship. If the time between
defrosts is greater than 96 hours (compressor ``on'' time) and this
defrost period can be repeated on a second unit, the test may be
terminated at 96 hours (CT) and the absolute time value used for MTBD
for each unit.
5. Test Measurements.
5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made
at the locations prescribed in Figure 7-2 of HRF-1-1979 and shall be
accurate to within +-0.5 [deg]F. (0.3 [deg]C.) of true value.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the
average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular time.
Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four
minutes.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each
test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken
during a complete cycle or several complete cycles of the compressor
motor (one compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and one
complete motor ``off'' period). For long-time automatic defrost models,
compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the
test period specified in 4.1.1. For models equipped with variable
defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in
the first part of the test period specified in 4.1.2.2.
5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which
the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to
determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of
minutes between measured temperature readings rounded up to the next
whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding
one hour. One of the cycles shall be the last complete compressor motor
cycles during the test period.
5.1.2.2 If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment
temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures
[[Page 140]]
taken during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3 If incomplete cycling occurs (less than one cycle) the
compartment temperature shall be the average of all readings taken
during the last three hours of the last complete ``on'' period.
5.2 Energy Measurements:
5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in
kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended
during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour
period.
The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy
consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
ET=(EPx1440x K)/T where
ET=test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day,
EP=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period.
T=length of time of the test period in minutes,
1440=conversion factor to adjust to a 24 hour period in minutes per day,
and
K=correction factor of 0.7 for chest freezers and 0.85 for upright
freezers to adjust for average household usage, dimensionless.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is
used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be
calculated equivalent to:
ET=(1440x Kx EP1/T1) + ((EP2-(EP1x T2/T1))x Kx12/CT)
where
ET, 1440, and K are defined in 5.2.1.1
EP1=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the test.
EP2=energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test,
CT=Defrost timer run time in hours required to cause it to go through a
complete cycle, to the nearest tenth hour per cycle,
12=conversion factor to adjust for a 50% run time of the compressor in
hours per day, and
T1 and T2=length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively.
5.2.1.3 Variable defrost control. The energy consumption in
kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:
ET=(1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1) x (12/CT) where 1440 is
defined in 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2 and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2.
CT=(CTL x CTM)/(Fx (CTM -
CTL) + CTL)
where:
CTL=least or shortest time between defrost in tenths of an
hour (greater than or equal to 6 hours but less than or equal to 12
hours, 6 <= L <= 12)
CTM=maximum time between defrost cycles in tenths of an hour
(greater than CTL but not more than 96 hours, CTL
<= CTM <= 96)
F=ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy and
the maximum difference in per day energy consumption and is equal to
F=(1/CT - 1/CTM)/(1/CTL - 1/CTM) = (ET
- ETL)/(ETM - ETL) or 0.20 in lieu of
testing to find CT
ETL=least electrical energy consumed, in kilowatt hours
ETM=maximum electrical energy consumed, in kilowatt hours
For demand defrost models with no values for CTL and
CTM in the algorithm the default values of 12 and 84 shall be
used, respectively.
5.2.1.4 Variable defrost control optional test. Perform the optional
test for variable defrost control models to find CT.
CT=MTBD x 0.5
MTBD=mean time between defrost
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.028
X=time between defrost cycles
N=number of defrost cycles
5.3 Volume measurements. The total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be
measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and section 5.1
through 5.3.
6. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements.
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for
freezers under test shall be defined as:
VA=VTx CF
where
VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,
VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet, and
CF=Correction factor of 1.73, dimensionless.
6.2 Average Per Cycle Energy Consumption:
6.2.1 The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth
(0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the compartment temperature
attainable as shown below.
6.2.1.1 If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 [deg]F.
(-17.8 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be
equivalent to:
E=ET1
where
E=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day.
[[Page 141]]
ET is defined in 5.2.1, and
Number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest compartment
temperature is measured.
6.2.1.2 If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test
period is greater than 0.0 [deg]F. (17.8 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle
energy consumption shall be equivalent to:
E=ET1+((ET2-ET1)x(0.0-TF1)/(TF2-TF1))
where
E is defined in 6.2.1.1
ET is defined in 5.2.1
TF=compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.2 in degrees F.
Numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and second
test period as appropriate, and
0.0=Standardized compartment temperature in degrees F.
[47 FR 34528, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at
54 FR 36241, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989]
Appendix C to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers
The provisions of this Appendix C shall apply to products
manufactured after September 29, 2003. The restriction on
representations concerning energy use or efficiency in 42 U.S.C.
6293(c)(2) shall apply on February 25, 2004.
1. Definitions
1.1 AHAM means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.2 Compact dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity of
less than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in
ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (see Sec. 430.22), using the test load specified in
section 2.7 of this Appendix.
1.3 Cycle means a sequence of operations of a dishwasher which
performs a complete dishwashing function, and may include variations or
combinations of washing, rinsing, and drying.
1.4 Cycle type means any complete sequence of operations capable of
being preset on the dishwasher prior to the initiation of machine
operation.
1.5 Non-soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that does not
have the ability to adjust automatically any energy consuming aspect of
a wash cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
1.6 Normal cycle means the cycle type recommended by the
manufacturer for completely washing a full load of normally soiled
dishes including the power-dry feature.
1.7 Power-dry feature means the introduction of electrically
generated heat into the washing chamber for the purpose of improving the
drying performance of the dishwasher.
1.8 Preconditioning cycle means any cycle that includes a fill,
circulation, and drain to ensure that the water lines and sump area of
the pump are primed.
1.9 Sensor heavy response means, for standard dishwashers, the set
of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load
of dishes, four place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/
AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). For compact
dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that two soiled place
settings are used instead of four.
1.10 Sensor light response means, for both standard and compact
dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for
completely washing a load of dishes, one place setting of which is
soiled with half of the gram weight of soils for each item specified in
a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 430.22).
1.11 Sensor medium response means, for standard dishwashers, the set
of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load
of dishes, two place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM
DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). For compact
dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that one soiled place
setting is used instead of two.
1.12 Soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that has the ability
to adjust any energy consuming aspect of a wash cycle based on the soil
load of the dishes.
1.13 Standard dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity
equal to or greater than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as
specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec.
430.22), using the test load specified in section 2.7 of this Appendix.
1.14 Standby mode means the lowest power consumption mode which
cannot be switched off or influenced by the user and that may persist
for an indefinite time when the dishwasher is connected to the main
electricity supply and used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
1.15 Truncated normal cycle means the normal cycle interrupted to
eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse
operation.
1.16 Truncated sensor heavy response means the sensor heavy response
interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of
the last rinse operation.
1.17 Truncated sensor light response means the sensor light response
interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of
the last rinse operation.
1.18 Truncated sensor medium response means the sensor medium
response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature
[[Page 142]]
after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.19 Water-heating dishwasher means a dishwasher which, as
recommended by the manufacturer, is designed for heating cold inlet
water (nominal 50 [deg]F) or designed for heating water with a nominal
inlet temperature of 120 [deg]F. Any dishwasher designated as water-
heating (50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F inlet water) must provide internal
water heating to above 120 [deg]F in at least one wash phase of the
normal cycle.
2. Testing conditions:
2.1 Installation Requirements. Install the dishwasher according to
the manufacturer's instructions. A standard or compact under-counter or
under-sink dishwasher must be tested in a rectangular enclosure
constructed of nominal 0.374 inch (9.5 mm) plywood painted black. The
enclosure must consist of a top, a bottom, a back, and two sides. If the
dishwasher includes a counter top as part of the appliance, omit the top
of the enclosure. Bring the enclosure into the closest contact with the
appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow.
2.2 Electrical energy supply.
2.2.1 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 115
volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 115 volts +-
2 percent and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified
by the manufacturer.
2.2.2 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 240
volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 240 volts +-
2 percent and within 1 percent of its nameplate frequency as specified
by the manufacturer.
2.3 Water temperature. Measure the temperature of the water supplied
to the dishwasher using a temperature measuring device as specified in
section 3.1 of this Appendix.
2.3.1 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 140[deg] +- 2
[deg]F.
2.3.2 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 120 [deg]F inlet water
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 120[deg] +- 2
[deg]F.
2.3.3 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 50 [deg]F inlet water
temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 50[deg] +- 2
[deg]F.
2.4 Water pressure. Using a water pressure gauge as specified in
section 3.4 of this Appendix, maintain the pressure of the water supply
at 35 +- 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) when the water is
flowing.
2.5 Ambient and machine temperature. Using a temperature measuring
device as specified in section 3.1 of this Appendix, maintain the room
ambient air temperature at 75[deg] +- 5 [deg]F, and ensure that the
dishwasher and the test load are at room ambient temperature at the
start of each test cycle.
2.6 Test Cycle and Load.
2.6.1 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet
temperature of 140 [deg]F. These units must be tested on the normal
cycle and truncated normal cycle without a test load if the dishwasher
does not heat water in the normal cycle.
2.6.2 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet
temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F. These units must be tested on
the normal cycle with a clean load of eight place settings plus six
serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7 of this Appendix. If the
capacity of the dishwasher, as stated by the manufacturer, is less than
eight place settings, then the test load must be the stated capacity.
2.6.3 Soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet
temperature of 50 [deg]F, 120 [deg]F, or 140 [deg]F. These units must be
tested first for the sensor heavy response, then tested for the sensor
medium response, and finally for the sensor light response with the
following combinations of soiled and clean test loads.
2.6.3.1 For tests of the sensor heavy response, as defined in
section 1.9 of this Appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in
section 2.7 of this Appendix. Four of the eight place settings must be
soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec.
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all
flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of
this Appendix. Two of the four place settings must be soiled according
to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while
the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not
soiled.
2.6.3.2 For tests of the sensor medium response, as defined in
section 1.11 of this Appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in
section 2.7 of this Appendix. Two of the eight place settings must be
soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec.
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all
flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of
this Appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled according
to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while
the remaining place settings, serving pieces and all flatware are not
soiled.
2.6.3.3 For tests of the sensor light response, as defined in
section 1.10 of this Appendix:
[[Page 143]]
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a
total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in
section 2.7 of this Appendix. One of the eight place settings must be
soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting
according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec.
430.22) while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all
flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four
place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of
this Appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled with half
of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to the
ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) while the
remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not
soiled.
2.7 Test Load.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dishware/glassware/flatware Alternate
item Primary source Description Primary No. Alternate source source No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dinner Plate................. Corning 10 inch Dinner 6003893
Comcor[reg]/ Plate.
Corelle[reg].
Bread and Butter Plate....... Corning 6.75 inch Bread 6003887 Arzberg......... 8500217100
Comcor[reg]/ & Butter.
Corelle[reg].
Fruit Bowl................... Corning 10 oz. Dessert 6003899 Arzberg......... 3820513100
Comcor[reg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[reg].
Cup.......................... Corning 8 oz. Ceramic 6014162 Arzberg......... 3824732100
Comcor[reg]/ Cup.
Corelle[reg].
Saucer....................... Corning 6 inch Saucer.. 6010972 Arzberg......... 3824731100
Comcor[reg]/
Corelle[reg].
Serving Bowl................. Corning 1 qt. Serving 6003911
Comcor[reg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[reg].
Platter...................... Corning 9.5 inch Oval 6011655
Comcor[reg]/ Platter.
Corelle[reg].
Glass-Iced Tea............... Libbey.......... ............... 551 HT
Flatware--Knife.............. Oneida[reg]--Acc ............... 2619KPVF
ent.
Flatware--Dinner Fork........ Oneida[reg]--Acc ............... 2619FRSF
ent.
Flatware--Salad Fork......... Oneida[reg]--Acc ............... 2619FSLF
ent.
Flatware--Teaspoon........... Oneida[reg]--Acc ............... 2619STSF
ent.
Flatware--Serving Fork....... Oneida[reg]--Fli ............... 2865FCM
ght.
Flatware--Serving Spoon...... Oneida[reg]--Acc ............... 2619STBF
ent.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.8 Detergent. Use half the quantity of detergent specified
according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec.
430.22).
2.9 Testing requirements. Provisions in this Appendix pertaining to
dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F
or 120 [deg]F apply only to water-heating dishwashers as defined in
section 1.19 of this Appendix.
2.10 Preconditioning requirements. Precondition the dishwasher by
establishing the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1 through
2.5 of this Appendix. Set the dishwasher to the preconditioning cycle as
defined in section 1.8 of this Appendix, without using a test load, and
initiate the cycle.
3. Instrumentation
Test instruments must be calibrated annually.
3.1 Temperature measuring device. The device must have an error no
greater than +- 1 [deg]F over the range being measured.
3.2 Timer. Time measurements for each monitoring period shall be
accurate to within 2 seconds.
3.3 Water meter. The water meter must have a resolution of no larger
than 0.1 gallons and a maximum error no greater than +- 1.5 percent of
the measured flow rate for all water temperatures encountered in the
test cycle.
3.4 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge must have a
resolution of one pound per square inch (psi) and must have an error no
greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 35 +- 2.5
psig.
3.5 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter must have a resolution of 1
watt-hour or less and a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the
measured value for any demand greater than 50 watts.
3.6 Standby wattmeter. The standby wattmeter must have a resolution
of 0.1 watt or less, a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the
measured value, and must be capable of operating within the stated
tolerances for input voltages up to 5 percent total harmonic distortion.
The standby wattmeter must be capable of operating at frequencies from
47 hertz through 63 hertz. Power measurements must have a crest factor
of 3 or more at currents of 2 amps RMS or less.
3.7 Standby watt-hour meter. The standby watt-hour meter must meet
all the requirements of the standby wattmeter and must accumulate watt-
hours at a minimum power level of 20 milliwatts.
[[Page 144]]
4. Test Cycle and Measurements
4.1 Test cycle. Perform a test cycle by establishing the testing
conditions set forth in section 2 of this Appendix, setting the
dishwasher to the cycle type to be tested, initiating the cycle, and
allowing the cycle to proceed to completion.
4.2 Machine electrical energy consumption. Measure the machine
electrical energy consumption, M, expressed as the number of kilowatt-
hours of electricity consumed by the machine during the entire test
cycle, using a water supply temperature as set forth in section 2.3 of
this Appendix and using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of
this Appendix.
4.3 Water consumption. Measure the water consumption, V, expressed
as the number of gallons of water delivered to the machine during the
entire test cycle, using a water meter as specified in section 3.3 of
this Appendix.
4.4 Standby power. Connect the dishwasher to a standby wattmeter or
a standby watt-hour meter as specified in sections 3.6 and 3.7,
respectively, of this Appendix. Select the conditions necessary to
achieve operation in the standby mode as defined in section 1.14 of this
Appendix. Monitor the power consumption but allow the dishwasher to
stabilize for at least 5 minutes. Then monitor the power consumption for
at least an additional 5 minutes. If the power level does not change by
more than 5 percent from the maximum observed value during the later 5
minutes and there is no cyclic or pulsing behavior of the load, the load
can be considered stable. For stable operation, standby power,
Sm, can be recorded directly from the standby watt meter in
watts or accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of
at least 5 minutes. For unstable operation, the energy must be
accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of at least
5 minutes and must capture the energy use over one or more complete
cycles. Calculate the average standby power, Sm, expressed in
watts by dividing the accumulated energy consumption by the duration of
the measurement period.
5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
5.1 Machine energy consumption.
5.1.1 Machine energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric
dishwashers. Take the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix as
the per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Express the value,
M, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.1.2 Machine energy consumption for soil-sensing electric
dishwashers. The machine energy consumption for the sensor normal cycle,
M, is defined as:
M = (MhrxFhr) + (MmrxFmr) +
(MlrxFlr)
where,
Mhr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,
Mmr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,
Mlr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,
Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,
Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33,
Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.2 Drying energy.
5.2.1 Drying energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric
dishwashers. Calculate the amount of energy consumed using the power-dry
feature after the termination of the last rinse option of the normal
cycle. Express the value, ED, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.2.2 Drying energy consumption for soil-sensing electric
dishwashers. The drying energy consumption, ED, for the
sensor normal cycle is defined as:
ED = (EDhr + EDmr + EDlr)/3
Where,
EDhr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor heavy
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
EDmr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor medium
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
EDlr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor light
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.3 Water consumption.
5.3.1 Water consumption for non-soil-sensing dishwashers using
electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
Take the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix as the per-
cycle water energy consumption. Express the value, V, in gallons per
cycle.
5.3.2 Water consumption for soil-sensing dishwashers using
electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
The water consumption for the sensor normal cycle, V, is defined as:
V = (VhrxFhr) + (VmrxFmr) +
(VlrxFlr)
Where,
Vhr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,
[[Page 145]]
Vmr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,
Vlr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this Appendix for
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,
Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,
Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33,
Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.4 Water energy consumption for non-soil-sensing or soil-sensing
dishwashers using electrically heated water.
5.4.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water
temperature, only. For the normal and truncated normal test cycle,
calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours
per cycle and defined as:
W = VxTxK
Where,
V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,
K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.4.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water
temperature of 120 [deg]F. For the normal and truncated normal test
cycle, calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle and defined as:
W = VxTxK
Where,
V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,
K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.5 Water energy consumption per cycle using gas-heated or oil-
heated water.
5.5.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water
temperature, only.
For each test cycle, calculate the water energy consumption using
gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per
cycle and defined as:
Wg = VxTxC/e
Where,
V = reported water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in
section 5.3.2 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,
C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2,
e = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.5.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water
temperature of 120 [deg]F. For each test cycle, calculate the water
energy consumption using gas heated or oil heated water, Wg,
expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as:
Wg = VxTxC/e
Where,
V = reported water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in
section 5.3.2 of this Appendix,
T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,
C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2,
e = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.6 Annual standby energy consumption. Calculate the estimated
annual standby energy consumption. First determine the number of standby
hours per year, Hs, defined as:
Hs = H-(NxL).
Where,
H = the total number of hours per year = 8766 hours per year,
N = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year,
L = the average of the duration of the normal cycle and truncated normal
cycle, for non-soil-sensing dishwashers with a truncated
normal cycle; the duration of the normal cycle, for non-soil-
sensing dishwashers without a truncated normal cycle; the
average duration of the sensor light response, truncated
sensor light response, sensor medium response, truncated
sensor medium response, sensor heavy response, and truncated
sensor heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers with a
truncated cycle option; the average duration of the sensor
light response, sensor medium response, and sensor heavy
response, for soil-sensing dishwashers without a truncated
cycle option.
Then calculate the estimated annual standby power use, S, expressed
in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as:
S = Smx((Hs)/1000)
Where,
Sm = the average standby power in watts as determined in
section 4.4 of this Appendix.
[68 FR 51900, Aug. 29, 2003]
[[Page 146]]
Appendix D to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers
1. Definitions
1.1 ``AHAM'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.2 ``Bone dry'' means a condition of a load of test clothes which
has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for
10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent
or less.
1.3 ``Compact'' or compact size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum
capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.4 ``Cool down'' means that portion of the clothes drying cycle
when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes
continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.5 ``Cycle'' means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which
performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or
combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling and drying.
1.6 ``Drum capacity'' means the volume of the drying drum in cubic
feet.
1.7 ``HLD-1'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled
``AHAM Performance Evaluation Procedure for Household Tumble Type
Clothes Dryers'', June 1974, and designated as HLD-1.
1.8 ``HLD-2EC'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and
titled ``Test Method for Measuring Energy Consumption of Household
Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,'' December 1975, and designated as HLD-2EC.
1.9 ``Standard size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of
4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.10 ``Moisture content'' means the ratio of the weight of water
contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load,
expressed as a percent.
1.11 ``Automatic termination control'' means a dryer control system
with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its
moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates
the drying process. A mark or detent which indicates a preferred
automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to
be classified as having an ``automatic termination control.'' A mark is
a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
1.12 ``Temperature sensing control'' means a system which monitors
dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer
cycle.
1.13 ``Moisture sensing control'' means a system which utilizes a
moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount
of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
2. testing conditions
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes dryer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. The dryer exhaust shall be restricted by
adding the AHAM exhaust simulator described in 3.3.5 of HLD-1. All
external joints should be taped to avoid air leakage. Disconnect all
console light or other lighting systems on the clothes dryer which do
not consume more than 10 watts during the clothes dryer test cycle.
2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity. Maintain the room ambient air
temperature at 75 +-3 [deg]F and the room relative humidity at 50+-10
percent relative humidity.
2.3 Energy supply.
2.3.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the
clothes dryer terminal block within 1 percent of 120/240 or 120/208Y or
120 volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system
and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the
manufacturer. If the dryer has a dual voltage conversion capability,
conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.3.2 Gas supply.
2.3.2.1 Natural gas. Maintains the gas supply to the clothes dryer
at a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7
to 10 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a
gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the
normal test pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the
manufacturer. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained
within +-5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. The
natural gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 1,025
Btu's per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hn2,
in Btu's per standard cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the
test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer
conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as
described in 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled natural gas whose Btu
rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be
obtained from measurements with a standard continuous flow calorimeter
as described in 2.4.6.
2.3.2.2 Propane gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer at
a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to
13 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas
appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the
normal test pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the
manufacturer. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained
within +-5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. The
propane gas supplied should have
[[Page 147]]
a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot.
The actual heating value, Hp, in Btu's per standard cubic
foot, for the propane gas to be used in the test shall be obtained
either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test
using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in 2.4.6 or by
the purchase of bottled gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least
as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurement with a
standard continuous calorimeter as described in 2.4.6.
2.4 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the
following instruments as appropriate.
2.4.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a range of
0 to a maximum of 30 pounds with a resolution of at least 0.2 ounces and
a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of any measured value within
the range of 3 to 15 pounds.
2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. The scale
should have a range of 0 to a maximum of 500 pounds with resolution of
0.50 pounds and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the
measured value.
2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a
resolution of 0.001 kilowatt-hours and a maximum error no greater than
0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.3 Gas meter. The gas meter shall have a resolution of 0.001
cubic feet and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the
measured value.
2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. The dry and wet bulb
psychrometer shall have an error no greater than +-1 [deg]F.
2.4.5 Temperature. The temperature sensor shall have an error no
greater than +-1 [deg]F.
2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. The Calorimeter shall
have an operating range of 750 to 3,500 Btu per cubic feet. The maximum
error of the basic calorimeter shall be no greater than 0.2 percent of
the actual heating value of the gas used in the test. The indicator
readout shall have a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the
measured value within the operating range and a resolution of 0.2
percent of the full scale reading of the indicator instrument.
2.5 Lint trap. Clean the lint trap thoroughly before each test run.
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and
consist of the following:
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite
weave, which is a blended fabric of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent
polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard
after test cloth preconditioning and has 65 ends on the warp and 57
picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50
percent cotton and 50 percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been
hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage
after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and
width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not
exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2 Energy stuffer cloths. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made
from energy test cloth material and shall consist of pieces of material
that are 12 inches by 12 inches and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10
inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not
be more than four percent on the length and width. The number of test
runs on the same energy stuffer cloth shall not exceed 25 runs after
test cloth preconditioning.
2.6.3 Test Cloth Preconditioning.
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as
follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of +-1 percent, or less, as
prescribed in Section 1.2.
(2) Place test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the
maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17
parts per million hardness or less), using 6.0 grams of AHAM Standard
Test Detergent, IIA, per gallon of water. Wash water temperature is to
controlled at 140[deg]+-5 [deg]F (60[deg]+-2.7 [deg]C). Rinse water
temperature is to be controlled at 100[deg]+-5 [deg]F (37.7+-2.7
[deg]C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in Section 1.2 and weigh the
load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of one
percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent,
followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7 Test loads.
2.7.1 Compact size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of
energy cloths which weighs 3.00 pounds +-.03 pounds. Adjustments to the
test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy
stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths per load. Dampen
the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 100[deg] +-5
[deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for
approximately two minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then, extract
water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture
content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 73.5 percent of the bone-
dry weight of the test load.
2.7.2 Standard size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of
energy cloths which weighs 7.00 pounds +-.07 pounds. Adjustments to the
test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy
stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths
[[Page 148]]
per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is
100[deg] +-5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness
for approximately two minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then,
extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the
moisture content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 73.5 percent of
the bone-dry weight of the test load.
2.7.3 Method of loading. Load the energy test cloths by grasping
them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them
in the dryer at random.
2.8 Clothes dryer preconditioning. Before any test cycle, operate
the dryer without a test load in the non-heat mode for 15 minutes or
until the discharge air temperature is varying less than 1 [deg]F for 10
minutes, which ever is longer, in the test installation location with
the ambient conditions within the specified rest condition tolerances of
2.2.
3. test procedures and measurements
3.1 Drum capacity. Measure the drum capacity by sealing all openings
in the drum except the loading port with a plastic bag, and ensure that
all corners and depressions are filled and that there are no extrusions
of the plastic bag through the opening in the drum. Support the dryer's
rear drum surface on a platform scale to prevent deflection of the
dryer, and record the weight of the empty dryer. Fill the drum with
water to a level determined by the intersection of the door plane and
the loading port. Record the temperature of the water and then the
weight of the dryer with the added water and then determine the mass of
the water in pounds. Add or subtract the appropriate volume depending on
whether or not the plastic bag protrudes into the drum interior. The
drum capacity is calculated as follows:
C=w/d
C= capacity in cubic feet.
w= weight of water in pounds.
d= density of water at the measured temperature in pounds per cubic
feet.
3.2 Dryer loading. Load the dryer as specified in 2.7.
3.3 Test cycle. Operate the clothes dryer at the maximum temperature
setting and, if equipped with a timer, at the maximum time setting and
dry the test load until the moisture content of the test load is between
2.5 percent to 5.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load, but
do not permit the dryer to advance into cool down. If required, reset
the timer or automatic dry control.
3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle:
3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as
described in 2.7.
3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test
described in 3.3.
3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature and percent relative
humidity described in 2.2.
3.4.5 For electric dryers--the total kilowatt-hours of electric
energy, Et, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6 For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, Ete,
consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, Etg, consumed during
the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.3 On gas dryers using a continuously burning pilot light--the
cubic feet of gas, Epg, consumed by the gas pilot light in
one hour.
3.4.6.4 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1
and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in
accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. A sample
calculation is illustrated in Appendix E of HLD-1.
3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor credits. Credit
for automatic termination can be claimed for those dryers which meet the
requirements for either temperature-sensing control, 1.12, or moisture
sensing control, 1.13, and having present the appropriate mark or detent
feed defined in 1.11.
4. calculation of derived results from test measurements
4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. Calculate the
total electric dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ece
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
Ece=[66/Ww-Wd)]xEttxFU
Et=the energy recorded in 3.4.5.
66=an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in
the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test cycle
expressed as a percent.
FU=Field use factor.
=1.18 for time termination control systems.
=1.04 for automatic control systems which meet the requirements of
the definitions for automatic termination controls in 1.11.1, 1.12 and
1.13.
Ww=the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded
in 3.4.2.
Wd=the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded
in 3.4.3.
4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. Calculate the
gas dryer electrical energy consumption per cycle, Ege,
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
Ege=[66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtexFU
Ete=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.1
FU, 66, Ww, Wd as defined in 4.1
4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas
dryer gas energy consumption per cycle, Ege. expressed in Btu's per
cycle as defined as:
Egg=[66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtgxFUxGEF
Etg=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.2
[[Page 149]]
GEF=corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic feet) as defined in
3.4.6.4
FU, 66, Ww Wd as defined in 4.1
4.4 Per-cycle gas dryer continuously burning pilot light gas energy
consumption. Calculate the gas dryer continuously burning pilot light
gas energy consumption per cycle, Eup expressed in Btu's per cycle and
defined as:
Eup=Epgx(8760-140/416)xGEF
Epg=the energy recorded in 3.4.6.3
8760=number of hours in a year
416=representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year
140=estimated number of hours that the continuously burning pilot
light is on during the operation of the clothes dryer for the
representative average use cycle for clothes dryers (416 cycles per
year)
GEF as defined in 4.3
4.5 Total per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption expressed in
Btu's. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Eg,
expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as:
Eg=Egg+Eup
Egg as defined in 4.3
Eup as defined in 4.4
4.6 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in
kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per
cycle, Ecg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
Ecg=Ege+(Eg/3412 Btu/k Wh)
Ege as defined in 4.2
Eg as defined in 4.5
[46 FR 27326, May 19, 1981]
Appendix E to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters
1. Definitions
1.1 Cut-in means the time when or water temperature at which a water
heater control or thermostat acts to increase the energy or fuel input
to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.2 Cut-out means the time when or water temperature at which a
water heater control or thermostat acts to reduce to a minimum the
energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.3 Design Power Rating means the nominal power rating that a water
heater manufacturer assigns to a particular design of water heater,
expressed in kilowatts or Btu (kJ) per hour as appropriate.
1.4 Energy Factor means a measure of water heater overall
efficiency.
1.5 First-Hour Rating means an estimate of the maximum volume of
``hot'' water that a storage-type water heater can supply within an hour
that begins with the water heater fully heated (i.e., with all
thermostats satisfied). It is a function of both the storage volume and
the recovery rate.
1.6 Heat Trap means a device which can be integrally connected or
independently attached to the hot and/or cold water pipe connections of
a water heater such that the device will develop a thermal or mechanical
seal to minimize the recirculation of water due to thermal convection
between the water heater tank and its connecting pipes.
1.7 Instantaneous Water Heaters
1.7.1 Electric Instantaneous Water Heater Reserved.
1.7.2 Gas Instantaneous Water Heater means a water heater that uses
gas as the energy source, initiates heating based on sensing water flow,
is designed to deliver water at a controlled temperature of less than
180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has an input greater than 50,000 Btu/h (53 MJ/h)
but less than 200,000 Btu/h (210 MJ/h), and has a manufacturer's
specified storage capacity of less than 2 gallons (7.6 liters). The unit
may use a fixed or variable burner input.
1.8 Maximum gpm (L/min) Rating means the maximum gallons per minute
(liters per minute) of hot water that can be supplied by an
instantaneous water heater while maintaining a nominal temperature rise
of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) during steady state operation.
1.9 Rated Storage Volume means the water storage capacity of a water
heater, in gallons (liters), as specified by the manufacturer.
1.10 Recovery Efficiency means the ratio of energy delivered to the
water to the energy content of the fuel consumed by the water heater.
1.11 Standby means the time during which water is not being
withdrawn from the water heater. There are two standby time intervals
used within this test procedure: [tau]stby,1 represents the
elapsed time between the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature
is observed after the sixth draw and subsequent recovery and the end of
the 24-hour test; [tau]stby,2 represents the total time
during the 24-hour simulated use test when water is not being withdrawn
from the water heater.
1.12 Storage-type Water Heaters
1.12.1 Electric Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that
uses electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store
water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180
[deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a nominal input of 12 kilowatts (40,956 Btu/h)
or less, and has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons
(76 liters) nor more than 120 gallons (450 liters).
1.12.2 Gas Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses
gas as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a
thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82
[deg]C), has a nominal input of 75,000 Btu (79 MJ) per hour or less, and
has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons (76 liters) nor
more than 100 gallons (380 liters).
[[Page 150]]
1.12.3 Heat Pump Water Heater means a water heater that uses
electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at
a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82
[deg]C), has a maximum current rating of 24 amperes (including the
compressor and all auxiliary equipment such as fans, pumps, controls,
and, if on the same circuit, any resistive elements) for an input
voltage of 250 volts or less, and, if the tank is supplied, has a
manufacturer's rated storage capacity of 120 gallons (450 liters) or
less. Resistive elements used to provide supplemental heating may use
the same circuit as the compressor if (1) an interlocking mechanism
prevents concurrent compressor operation and resistive heating or (2)
concurrent operation does not result in the maximum current rating of 24
amperes being exceeded. Otherwise, the resistive elements and the heat
pump components must use separate circuits. A heat pump water heater may
be sold by the manufacturer with or without a storage tank.
a. Heat Pump Water Heater with Storage Tank means an air-to-water
heat pump sold by the manufacturer with an insulated storage tank as a
packaged unit. The tank and heat pump can be an integral unit or they
can be separated.
b. Heat Pump Water Heater without Storage Tank (also called Add-on
Heat Pump Water Heater) means an air-to-water heat pump designed for use
with a storage-type water heater or a storage tank that is not specified
or supplied by the manufacturer.
1.12.4 Oil Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses
oil as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a
thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82
[deg]C), has a nominal energy input of 105,000 Btu/h (110 MJ/h) or less,
and has a manufacturer's rated storage capacity of 50 gallons (190
liters) or less.
1.12.5 Storage-type Water Heater of More than 2 Gallons (7.6 Liters)
and Less than 20 Gallons (76 Liters). Reserved.
1.13 ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 means the standard published in 1986 by
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc., and titled Standard Measurement Guide: Section on
Temperature Measurements.
1.14 ASTM-D-2156-80 means the test standard published in 1980 by the
American Society for Testing and Measurements and titled ``Smoke Density
in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels, Test Method for''.
1.15 Symbol Usage The following identity relationships are provided
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure:
Cp specific heat capacity of water
Eannual annual energy consumption of a water heater
Ef energy factor of a water heater
Fhr first-hour rating of a storage-type water heater
Fmax maximum gpm (L/min) rating of an instantaneous water
heater rated at a temperature rise of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) across the
heater
i a subscript to indicate an ith draw during a test
Mi mass of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of
the 24-hr simulated use test
M*i for storage-type water heaters, mass of water removed
during the ith draw (i=1 to n) during the first-hour rating test
M10m for instantaneous water heaters, mass of water removed
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min)
rating test
n for storage-type water heaters, total number of draws during the
first-hour rating test
Q total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed during the entire
24-hr simulated use test
Qd daily water heating energy consumption adjusted for net
change in internal energy
Qda adjusted daily water heating energy consumption with
adjustment for variation of tank to ambient air temperature difference
from nominal value
Qdm overall adjusted daily water heating energy consumption
including Qda and QHWD
Qhr hourly standby losses
QHW daily energy consumption to heat water over the measured
average temperature rise across the water heater
QHWD adjustment to daily energy consumption, Qhw,
due to variation of the temperature rise across the water heater not
equal to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C)
Qr energy consumption of fossil fuel or heat pump water
heaters between thermostat (or burner) cut-out prior to the first draw
and cut-out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qr, max energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous
water heater between cut-out (burner) prior to the first draw and cut-
out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qr, min energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous
water heater from immediately prior to the fourth draw to burner cut-out
following the fourth draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Qstby total energy consumed by the water heater during the
standby time interval [tau]stby, 1
Qsu total fossil fueled and/or electric energy consumed from
the beginning of the first draw to the thermostat (or burner) cut-out
following the completion of the sixth draw during the 24-hr simulated
use test
Tmin for modulating instantaneous water heaters, steady state
outlet water temperature at the minimum fuel input rate
T0 mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hr
simulated use test
[[Page 151]]
T24 mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hr simulated
use test
Ta, stby average ambient air temperature during standby
periods of the 24-hr use test
Tdel for instantaneous water heaters, average outlet water
temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum
gpm (L/min) rating test
Tdel, i average outlet water temperature during the ith draw
of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tin for instantaneous water heaters, average inlet water
temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum
gpm (L/min) rating test
Tin, i average inlet water temperature during the ith draw of
the 24-hr simulated use test
Tmax, 1 maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out
following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tstby average storage tank temperature during the standby
period [tau]stby, 2 of the 24-hr use test
Tsu maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out
following the sixth draw of the 24-hr simulated use test
Tt, stby average storage tank temperature during the standby
period [tau]stby, 1 of the 24-hr use test
T*del, i for storage-type water heaters, average outlet water
temperature during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour rating test
T*max, i for storage-type water heaters, maximum outlet water
temperature observed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour
rating test
T*min, i for storage-type water heaters, minimum outlet water
temperature to terminate the ith draw during the first-hour rating test
UA standby loss coefficient of a storage-type water heater
Vi volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of
the 24-hr simulated use test
V*i volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to n)
during the first-hour rating test
V10m for instantaneous water heaters, volume of water removed
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min)
rating test
Vmax steady state water flow rate of an instantaneous water
heater at the rated input to give a discharge temperature of 135 [deg]F
+- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C)
Vmin steady state water flow rate of a modulating
instantaneous water heater at the minimum input to give a discharge
temperature of Tmin up to 135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C
+- 2.8 [deg]C)
Vst measured storage volume of the storage tank
Wf weight of storage tank when completely filled with water
Wt tare weight of storage tank when completely empty of water
nr recovery efficiency
p density of water
[tau]stby, 1 elapsed time between the time the maximum mean
tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-
hr simulated use test
[tau]stby, 2 overall standby periods when no water is
withdrawn during the 24-hr simulated use test
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Installation Requirements. Tests shall be performed with the
water heater and instrumentation installed in accordance with Section 4
of this appendix.
2.2 Ambient Air Temperature. The ambient air temperature shall be
maintained between 65.0 [deg]F and 70.0 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C and 21.1
[deg]C) on a continuous basis. For heat pump water heaters, the dry bulb
temperature shall be maintained at 67.5 [deg]F +- 1 [deg]F (19.7 [deg]C
+- 0.6 [deg]C) and, in addition, the relative humidity shall be
maintained between 49% and 51%.
2.3 Supply Water Temperature. The temperature of the water being
supplied to the water heater shall be maintained at 58 [deg]F +- 2
[deg]F (14.4 [deg]C +- 1.1 [deg]C) throughout the test.
2.4 Storage Tank Temperature. The average temperature of the water
within the storage tank shall be set to 135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C).
2.5 Supply Water Pressure. During the test when water is not being
withdrawn, the supply pressure shall be maintained between 40 psig (275
kPa) and the maximum allowable pressure specified by the water heater
manufacturer.
2.6 Electrical and/or Fossil Fuel Supply.
2.6.1 Electrical. Maintain the electrical supply voltage to within
+- 1% of the center of the voltage range specified by the water heater
and/or heat pump manufacturer.
2.6.2 Natural Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not
specified, maintain a supply pressure of 7-10 inches of water column
(1.7-2.5 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance
pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within +- 10%
of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use
natural gas having a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btu per
standard cubic foot (38,190 kJ per standard cubic meter).
2.6.3 Propane Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not
specified, maintain a supply pressure of 11-13 inches of water column
(2.7-3.2 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance
pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within +- 10%
of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use
propane gas with a heating
[[Page 152]]
value of approximately 2,500 Btu per standard cubic foot (93,147 kJ per
standard cubic meter).
2.6.4 Fuel Oil Supply. Maintain an uninterrupted supply of fuel oil.
Use fuel oil having a heating value of approximately 138,700 Btu per
gallon (38,660 kJ per liter).
3. Instrumentation
3.1 Pressure Measurements. Pressure-measuring instruments shall have
an error no greater than the following values:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gas pressure................ +- 0.1 inch of water +- 0.05 inch of
column (+- 0.025 water column (+-
kPa). 0.012 kPa).
Atmospheric pressure........ +- 0.1 inch of +- 0.05 inch of
mercury column (+- mercury column (+-
0.34 kPa). 0.17 kPa).
Water pressure.............. +- 1.0 pounds per +- 0.50 pounds per
square inch (+- 6.9 square inch (+-
kPa). 3.45 kPa).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Temperature Measurement
3.2.1 Measurement. Temperature measurements shall be made in
accordance with the Standard Measurement Guide: Section on Temperature
Measurements, ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86.
3.2.2 Accuracy and Precision. The accuracy and precision of the
instruments, including their associated readout devices, shall be within
the following limits:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air dry bulb temperature............. +- 0.2 [deg]F (+- 0.1 [deg]C) +- 0.1 [deg]F (+- 0.06 [deg]C)
Air wet bulb temperature............. +- 0.2 [deg]F (+- 0.1 [deg]C) +- 0.1 [deg]F (+- 0.06 [deg]C)
Inlet and outlet water temperatures.. +- 0.2 [deg]F (+- 0.1 [deg]C) +- 0.1 [deg]F (+- 0.06 [deg]C)
Storage tank temperatures............ +- 0.5 [deg]F (+- 0.3 [deg]C) +- 0.25 [deg]F (+- 0.14 [deg]C)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 Scale Division. In no case shall the smallest scale division
of the instrument or instrument system exceed 2 times the specified
precision.
3.2.4 Temperature Difference. Temperature difference between the
entering and leaving water may be measured with any of the following:
a. A thermopile
b. Calibrated resistance thermometers
c. Precision thermometers
d. Calibrated thermistors
e. Calibrated thermocouples
f. Quartz thermometers
3.2.5 Thermopile Construction. If a thermopile is used, it shall be
made from calibrated thermocouple wire taken from a single spool.
Extension wires to the recording device shall also be made from that
same spool.
3.2.6 Time Constant. The time constant of the instruments used to
measure the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be no greater than
5 seconds.
3.3 Liquid Flow Rate Measurement. The accuracy of the liquid flow
rate measurement, using the calibration if furnished, shall be equal to
or less than +- 1% of the measured value in mass units per unit time.
3.4 Electric Energy. The electrical energy used shall be measured
with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within
+- 1% of the reading.
3.5 Fossil Fuels. The quantity of fuel used by the water heater
shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that
is accurate within +- 1% of the reading.
3.6 Mass Measurements. For mass measurements greater than or equal
to 10 pounds (4.5 kg), a scale that is accurate within +- 1% of the
reading shall be used to make the measurement. For mass measurements
less than 10 pounds (4.5 kg), the scale shall provide a measurement that
is accurate within +- 0.1 pound (0.045 kg).
3.7 Heating Value. The higher heating value of the natural gas,
propane, or fuel oil shall be measured with an instrument and associated
readout device that is accurate within +- 1% of the reading. The heating
value of natural gas and propane must be corrected for local temperature
and pressure conditions.
3.8 Time. The elapsed time measurements shall be measured with an
instrument that is accurate within +- 0.5 seconds per hour.
3.9 Volume. Volume measurements shall be measured with an accuracy
of +- 2% of the total volume.
4. Installation
4.1 Water Heater Mounting. A water heater designed to be
freestanding shall be placed on a \3/4\ inch (2 cm) thick plywood
platform supported by three 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) runners. If the
water heater is not approved for installation on combustible flooring,
suitable non-combustible material shall be placed between the water
heater and the
[[Page 153]]
platform. Counter-top water heaters shall be placed against a simulated
wall section. Wall-mounted water heaters shall be supported on a
simulated wall in accordance with the manufacturer-published
installation instructions. When a simulated wall is used, the
recommended construction is 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) studs, faced with
\3/4\ inch (2 cm) plywood. For heat pump water heaters that are supplied
with a storage tank, the two components, if not delivered as a single
package, shall be connected in accordance with the manufacturer-
published installation instructions and the overall system shall be
placed on the above-described plywood platform. If installation
instructions are not provided by the heat pump manufacturer, uninsulated
8 foot (2.4 m) long connecting hoses having an inside diameter of \5/8\
inch (1.6 cm) shall be used to connect the storage tank and the heat
pump water heater. With the exception of using the storage tank
described in 4.10, the same requirements shall apply for heat pump water
heaters that are supplied without a storage tank from the manufacturer.
The testing of the water heater shall occur in an area that is protected
from drafts.
4.2 Water Supply. Connect the water heater to a water supply capable
of delivering water at conditions as specified in Sections 2.3 and 2.5
of this appendix.
4.3 Water Inlet and Outlet Configuration. For freestanding water
heaters that are taller than 36 inches (91.4 cm), inlet and outlet
piping connections shall be configured in a manner consistent with
Figures 1 and 2. Inlet and outlet piping connections for wall-mounted
water heaters shall be consistent with Figure 3. For freestanding water
heaters that are 36 inches or less in height and not supplied as part of
a counter-top enclosure (commonly referred to as an under-the-counter
model), inlet and outlet piping shall be installed in a manner
consistent with Figures 4, 5, and 6. For water heaters that are supplied
with a counter-top enclosure, inlet and outlet piping shall be made in a
manner consistent with Figures 7A and 7B, respectively. The vertical
piping noted in Figures 7A and 7B shall be located (whether inside the
enclosure or along the outside in a recessed channel) in accordance with
the manufacturer-published installation instructions.
All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 shall be achieved. All
piping between the water heater and the inlet and outlet temperature
sensors, noted as TIN and TOUT in the figures,
shall be Type ``L'' hard copper having the same diameter as the
connections on the water heater. Unions may be used to facilitate
installation and removal of the piping arrangements. A pressure gauge
and diaphragm expansion tank shall be installed in the supply water
piping at a location upstream of the inlet temperature sensor. An
appropriately rated pressure and temperature relief valve shall be
installed on all water heaters at the port specified by the
manufacturer. Discharge piping for the relief valve shall be non-
metallic. If heat traps, piping insulation, or pressure relief valve
insulation are supplied with the water heater, they shall be installed
for testing. Except when using a simulated wall, clearance shall be
provided such that none of the piping contacts other surfaces in the
test room.
[[Page 154]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.005
[[Page 155]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.006
[[Page 156]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.007
[[Page 157]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.008
4.4 Fuel and/or Electrical Power and Energy Consumption. Install one
or more instruments which measure, as appropriate, the quantity and rate
of electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumption in accordance with
Section 3. For heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive
heating, the electrical energy supplied to the resistive element(s)
shall be metered separately from the electrical energy supplied to the
entire appliance or to the remaining components (e.g., compressor, fans,
pumps, controls).
4.5 Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measurements. Install six
temperature measurement sensors inside the water heater tank with a
vertical distance of at least 4 inches (100 mm) between successive
sensors. A temperature sensor shall be positioned at the vertical
midpoint of each of the six equal
[[Page 158]]
volume nodes within the tank. Nodes designate the equal volumes used to
evenly partition the total volume of the tank. As much as is possible,
the temperature sensor should be positioned away from any heating
elements, anodic protective devices, tank walls, and flue pipe walls. If
the tank cannot accommodate six temperature sensors and meet the
installation requirements specified above, install the maximum number of
sensors which comply with the installation requirements. The temperature
sensors shall be installed either through (1) the anodic device opening;
(2) the relief valve opening; or (3) the hot water outlet. If installed
through the relief valve opening or the hot water outlet, a tee fitting
or outlet piping, as applicable, shall be installed as close as possible
to its original location. If the relief valve temperature sensor is
relocated, and it no longer extends into the top of the tank, a
substitute relief valve that has a sensing element that can reach into
the tank shall be installed. If the hot water outlet includes a heat
trap, the heat trap shall be installed on top of the tee fitting. Added
fittings shall be covered with thermal insulation having an R value
between 4 and 8 h0ft2/ [deg]F/Btu (0.7 and 1.4
m2/ [deg]C/W).
4.6 Ambient Air Temperature Measurement. Install an ambient air
temperature sensor at the vertical mid-point of the water heater and
approximately 2 feet (610 mm) from the surface of the water heater. The
sensor shall be shielded against radiation.
4.7 Inlet and Outlet Water Temperature Measurements. Install
temperature sensors in the cold-water inlet pipe and hot-water outlet
pipe as shown in Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7a and 7b, as applicable.
4.8 Flow Control. A valve shall be installed to provide flow as
specified in sections 5.1.4.1 for storage tank water heaters and 5.2.1
for instantaneous water heaters.
4.9 Flue Requirements.
4.9.1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a natural draft in the
following manner. For gas-fired water heaters with a vertically
discharging draft hood outlet, a 5-foot (1.5-meter) vertical vent pipe
extension with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the
draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. For gas-fired
water heaters with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-
degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of
the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A 5-foot
(1.5-meter) length of vent pipe shall be connected to the elbow and
oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct vent gas-fired water
heaters shall be installed with venting equipment specified in the
manufacturer's instructions using the minimum vertical and horizontal
lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
4.9.2 Oil-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a draft at the flue collar
at the value specified in the manufacturer's instructions. Establish the
draft by using a sufficient length of vent pipe connected to the water
heater flue outlet, and directed vertically upward. For an oil-fired
water heater with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-
degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of
the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A length of
vent pipe sufficient to establish the draft shall be connected to the
elbow fitting and oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct-vent
oil-fired water heaters should be installed with venting equipment as
specified in the manufacturer's instructions, using the minimum vertical
and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
4.10 Heat Pump Water Heater Storage Tank. The tank to be used for
testing a heat pump water heater without a tank supplied by the
manufacturer (see Section 1.12.3b) shall be an electric storage-type
water heater having a measured volume of 47.0 gallons +-1.0 gallon (178
liters +-3.8 liters); two 4.5 kW heating elements controlled in such a
manner as to prevent both elements from operating simultaneously; and an
energy factor greater than or equal to the minimum energy conservation
standard (as determined in accordance with Section 6.1.7) and less than
or equal to the sum of the minimum energy conservation standard and
0.02.
5. Test Procedures
5.1 Storage-type Water Heaters, Including Heat Pump Water Heaters.
5.1.1 Determination of Storage Tank Volume. Determine the storage
capacity, Vst, of the water heater under test, in gallons
(liters), by subtracting the tare weight--measured while the tank is
empty--from the gross weight of the storage tank when completely filled
with water (with all air eliminated and line pressure applied as
described in section 2.5) and dividing the resulting net weight by the
density of water at the measured temperature.
5.1.2 Setting the Thermostat.
5.1.2.1 Single Thermostat Tanks. Starting with a tank at the supply
water temperature, initiate normal operation of the water heater. After
cut-out, determine the mean tank temperature every minute until the
maximum value is observed. Determine whether this maximum value for the
mean tank temperature is within the range of 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C). If not, turn off the water heater, adjust the
thermostat, drain and refill the tank with supply water. Then, once
again, initiate normal operation of the water heater, and determine the
maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out. Repeat this sequence until
the maximum mean
[[Page 159]]
tank temperature after cut-out is 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8
[deg]C).
5.1.2.2 Tanks with Two or More Thermostats. Follow the same sequence
as for a single thermostat tank, i.e. start at the supply water
temperature, operate normally until cutout. Determine if the thermostat
that controls the uppermost heating element yields a maximum water
temperature of 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C), as
measured by the in-tank sensors that are positioned above the uppermost
heating element. If the tank temperature at the thermostat is not within
135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C), turn off the water
heater, adjust the thermostat, drain and refill the tank with supply
water. The thermostat that controls the heating element positioned next
highest in the tank shall then be set to yield a maximum water
temperature of 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C). This
process shall be repeated until the thermostat controlling the lowest
element is correctly adjusted. When adjusting the thermostat that
controls the lowest element, the maximum mean tank temperature after
cut-out, as determined using all the in-tank sensors, shall be 135
[deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C). When adjusting all other
thermostats, use only the in-tank temperature sensors positioned above
the heating element in question to evaluate the maximum water
temperature after cut-out.
For heat pump water heaters that control an auxiliary resistive
element, the thermostat shall be set in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
5.1.3 Power Input Determination. For all water heaters except
electric types having immersed heating elements, initiate normal
operation and determine the power input, P, to the main burners
(including pilot light power, if any) after 15 minutes of operation. If
the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator,
the regulator outlet pressure shall be set within +- 10% of that
recommended by the manufacturer. For oil-fired water heaters the fuel
pump pressure shall be within +- 10% of the manufacturer's specified
pump pressure. All burners shall be adjusted to achieve an hourly Btu
(kJ) rating that is within +- 2% of the value specified by the
manufacturer. For an oil-fired water heater, adjust the burner to give a
CO2 reading recommended by the manufacturer and an hourly Btu
(kJ) rating that is within +- 2% of that specified by the manufacturer.
Smoke in the flue may not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the
procedure in ASTM-D-2156-80.
5.1.4 First-Hour Rating Test.
5.1.4.1 General. During hot water draws, remove water at a rate of
3.0+-0.25 gallons per minute (11.4+-0.95 liters per minute). Collect the
water in a container that is large enough to hold the volume removed
during an individual draw and suitable for weighing at the termination
of each draw. Alternatively, a water meter may be used to directly
measure the water volume(s) withdrawn.
5.1.4.2 Draw Initiation Criteria. Begin the first-hour rating test
by imposing a draw on the storage-type water heater. After completion of
this first draw, initiate successive draws based on the following
criteria. For gas-and oil-fired water heaters, initiate successive draws
when the thermostat acts to reduce the supply of fuel to the main
burner. For electric water heaters having a single element or multiple
elements that all operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when
the thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input supplied to the
element(s). For electric water heaters having two or more elements that
do not operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the
applicable thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input to the element
located vertically highest in the storage tank. For heat pump waters
heaters that do not use supplemental resistive heating, initiate
successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the
compressor is reduced by the action of the water heater's thermostat.
For heat pump waters heaters that use supplemental resistive heating,
initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the
compressor or the uppermost resistive element is reduced by the action
of the applicable water heater thermostat. This draw initiation
criterion for heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive
heating, however, shall only apply when the water located above the
thermostat at cut-out is heated to 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-
2.8 [deg]C).
5.1.4.3 Test Sequence. Establish normal water heater operation. If
the water heater is not presently operating, initiate a draw. The draw
may be terminated anytime after cut-in occurs. After cut-out occurs
(i.e., all thermostats are satisfied), monitor the internal storage tank
temperature sensors described in section 4.5 every minute.
Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature has been
observed following cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated
and designate it as an elapsed time of zero ([tau]* = 0). (The
superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour
rating test.) Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds
after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until
the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that
occurs during this first draw and record it as T*max, 1. For
the duration of this first draw and all successive draws, in addition,
monitor the inlet temperature to the water heater to ensure that the
required 58 [deg]F+-2 [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C+-1.1 [deg]C) test condition is
met. Terminate the hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases
to T*max,1-25 [deg]F (T*max,1-13.9 [deg]C). Record
this temperature as
[[Page 160]]
T*min,1. Following draw termination, determine the average
outlet water temperature and the mass or volume removed during this
first draw and record them as T*del,1 and M*1 or
V*1, respectively.
Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw each time the
applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.1.4.2 are
satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water
temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second
intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum
outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as
T*max, i, where the subscript i refers to the draw number.
Terminate each hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to
T*max, i-25 [deg]F (T*max, i-13.9 [deg]C). Record
this temperature as T*min, i. Calculate and record the
average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during each
draw (T*del, i and M*i or V*i,
respectively). Continue this sequence of draw and recovery until one
hour has elapsed, then shut off the electrical power and/or fuel
supplied to the water heater.
If a draw is occurring at an elapsed time of one hour, continue this
draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T*max, n-25
[deg]F (T*max, n -13.9 [deg]C), at which time the draw shall
be immediately terminated. (The subscript n shall be used to denote
quantities associated with the final draw.) If a draw is not occurring
at an elapsed time of one hour, a final draw shall be imposed at one
hour. This draw shall be immediately terminated when the outlet
temperature first indicates a value less than or equal to the cut-off
temperature used for the previous draw (T*min, n-1). For
cases where the outlet temperature is close to T*min, n-1,
the final draw shall proceed for a minimum of 30 seconds. If an outlet
temperature greater than T*min, n-1 is not measured within 30
seconds, the draw shall be immediately terminated and zero additional
credit shall be given towards first-hour rating (i.e., M*n =
0 or V*n = 0). After the final draw is terminated, calculate
and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed
during the draw (T*del, n and M*n or
V*n, respectively).
5.1.5 24-Hour Simulated Use Test. During the simulated use test, a
total of 64.+-3 1.0 gallons (243+-3.8 liters) shall be removed. This
value is referred to as the daily hot water usage in the following text.
With the water heater turned off, fill the water heater with supply
water and apply pressure as described in section 2.5. Turn on the water
heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. After the cut-out
occurs, the water heater may be operated for up to three cycles of
drawing until cut-in, and then operating until cut-out, prior to the
start of the test.
At this time, record the mean tank temperature (To), and
the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin
the 24-hour simulated use test by withdrawing a volume from the water
heater that equals one-sixth of the daily hot water usage. Record the
time when this first draw is initiated and assign it as the test elapsed
time ([tau]) of zero (0). Record the average storage tank and ambient
temperature every 15 minutes throughout the 24-hour simulated use test
unless a recovery or a draw is occurring. At elapsed time intervals of
one, two, three, four, and five hours from [tau] = 0, initiate
additional draws, removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of
the daily hot water usage with the maximum allowable deviation for any
single draw being +- 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity of water
withdrawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or decreased as
necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals 64.3
gallons +- 1.0 gallon (243.4 liters +- 3.8 liters).
All draws during the simulated use test shall be made at flow rates
of 3.0 gallons +- 0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 liters +- 0.95 liters
per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be
made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 5-
second interval throughout the duration of each draw. The arithmetic
mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet
temperature shall be determined for each draw (Tdel, i and
Tin, i). Determine and record the net mass or volume removed
(Mi or Vi ), as appropriate, after each draw.
At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, record
the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out,
Tmax, 1, and the energy consumed by an electric resistance,
gas or oil-fired water heater, Qr. For heat pump water
heaters, the total electrical energy consumed during the first recovery
by the heat pump (including compressor, fan, controls, pump, etc.) and,
if applicable, by the resistive element(s) shall be recorded as
Qr.
At the end of the recovery period that follows the sixth draw,
determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel
consumed since the beginning of the test, Qsu. In preparation
for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading
given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or
the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the
maximum value of the mean tank temperature after cut-out as
Tsu. Except as noted below, allow the water heater to remain
in the standby mode until 24 hours have elapsed from the start of the
test (i.e., since = 0). Prevent the water heater from beginning a
recovery cycle during the last hour of the test by turning off the
electric power to the electrical heating elements and heat pump, if
present, or by turning down the fuel supply to the main burner at
[[Page 161]]
an elapsed time of 23 hours. If a recovery is taking place at an elapsed
time of 23 hours, wait until the recovery is complete before reducing
the electrical and/or fuel supply to the water heater. At 24 hours,
record the mean tank temperature, T24, and the electric and/
or fuel instrument readings. Determine the total fossil fuel or
electrical energy consumption, as appropriate, for the entire 24-hour
simulated use test, Q. Record the time interval between the time at
which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw
and the end of the 24-hour test as stby, 1. Record the time
during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater during
the entire 24-hour period as stby, 2.
5.2 Instantaneous Gas and Electric Water Heaters
5.2.1 Setting the Outlet Discharge Temperature. Initiate normal
operation of the water heater at the full input rating for electric
instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate specified by
the manufacturer for gas instantaneous water heaters. Monitor the
discharge water temperature and set to a value of 135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F
(57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. If the water heater is not capable of providing this
discharge temperature when the flow rate is 3.0 gallons +- 0.25 gallons
per minute (11.4 liters +- 0.95 liters per minute), then adjust the flow
rate as necessary to achieve the specified discharge water temperature.
Record the corresponding flow rate as Vmax.
5.2.2 Additional Requirements for Variable Input Instantaneous Gas
Water Heaters. If the instantaneous water heater incorporates a
controller that permits operation at a reduced input rate, adjust the
flow rate as necessary to achieve a discharge water temperature of 135
[deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) while maintaining the
minimum input rate. Record the corresponding flow rate as
Vmin. If an outlet temperature of 135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F
(57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) cannot be achieved at the minimum flow rate
permitted by the instantaneous water heater, record the flow rate as
Vmin and the corresponding outlet temperature as
Tmin.
5.2.3 Maximum GPM Rating Test for Instantaneous Water Heaters.
Establish normal water heater operation at the full input rate for
electric instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate for
gas instantaneous water heaters with the discharge water temperature set
in accordance with Section 5.2.1. During the 10-minute test, either
collect the withdrawn water for later measurement of the total mass
removed, or alternatively, use a water meter to directly measure the
water volume removed.
After recording the scale or water meter reading, initiate water
flow throughout the water heater, record the inlet and outlet water
temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at
subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At
the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine the mass of water
collected, M10m, in pounds (kilograms), or the volume of
water, V10m, in gallons (liters).
5.2.4 24-hour Simulated Use Test for Gas Instantaneous Water
Heaters.
5.2.4.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. Establish normal
operation with the discharge water temperature and flow rate set to
values of 135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) and
Vmax per Section 5.2.1, respectively. With no draw occurring,
record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy
meter as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated use test by drawing an
amount of water out of the water heater equivalent to one-sixth of the
daily hot water usage. Record the time when this first draw is initiated
and designate it as an elapsed time, [tau], of 0. At elapsed time
intervals of one, two, three, four, and five hours from [tau] = 0,
initiate additional draws, removing an amount of water equivalent to
one-sixth of the daily hot water usage, with the maximum allowable
deviation for any single draw being +- 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The
quantity of water drawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or
decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn
equals 64.3 gallons +- 1.0 gallons (243.4 liters +- 3.8 liters).
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be
made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 5-second
interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. The arithmetic
mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet
temperature shall be determined for each draw. Record the scale used to
measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as
appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period
following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or
electrical energy consumed, Qr. Following the sixth draw and
subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby
mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the test
(i.e., since [tau] = 0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the
gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Determine
the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour
simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.
5.2.4.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. If the
instantaneous water heater incorporates a controller that permits
continuous operation at a reduced input rate, the first three draws
shall be conducted using the maximum flow rate, Vmax, while
removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot
water usage, with the maximum allowable deviation for any one of
[[Page 162]]
the three draws being +- 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The second three
draws shall be conducted at Vmin. If an outlet temperature of
135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) could not be achieved
at the minimum flow rate permitted by the instantaneous water heater,
the last three draws should be lengthened such that the volume removed
is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.001
or
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.002
where Tmin is the outlet water temperature at the flow rate
Vmin as determined in Section 5.2.1, and where the maximum
allowable variation for any one of the three draws is +- 0.5 gallons
(1.9 liters). The quantity of water withdrawn during the sixth draw
shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume
of water withdrawn equals (32.15 + 3/V4,5,6) +-
1.0 gallons
((121.7 + 3 / V. 4,5,6) +- 3.8 liters).
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be
made 5 seconds after a draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval
thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Determine the arithmetic
mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet
temperature for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of
the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after
each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw,
determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed,
Qr, max. Likewise, record the reading of the meter used to
measure fossil fuel or electrical energy consumption prior to the fourth
draw and at the end of the recovery period following the fourth draw,
and designate the difference as Qr,min. Following the sixth
draw and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the
standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the
test (i.e., since [tau]=0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the
gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter, as appropriate. Determine
the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour
simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.
6. Computations
6.1 Storage Tank and Heat Pump Water Heaters.
6.1.1 Storage Tank Capacity. The storage tank capacity is computed
using the following:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.003
Where:
Vst = the storage capacity of the water heater, gal (L).
Wf = the weight of the storage tank when completely filled
with water, lb (kg).
Wt = the (tare) weight of the storage tank when completely
empty, lb (kg).
[rho] = the density of water used to fill the tank measured at the
temperature of the water, lb/gal (kg/L).
6.1.2. First-Hour Rating Computation. For the case in which the
final draw is initiated at or prior to an elapsed time of one hour, the
first-hour rating shall be computed using,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.004
Where:
n = the number of draws that are completed during the first-hour rating
test.
V*i = the volume of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, gal (L)
or, if the mass of water is being measured,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.005
Where:
M*i = the mass of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, lb (kg).
[rho] = the water density corresponding to the average outlet
temperature measured during the ith draw, (T*del, I), lb/gal
(kg/L).
For the case in which a draw is not in progress at the elapsed time
of one hour and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour,
the first-hour rating shall be calculated using
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.006
where n and V*i are the same quantities as defined above, and
V*n = the volume of water drawn during the nth (final) draw
of the first-hour rating test, gal (L)
T*del,n-1 = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
T*del,n = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the nth (final) draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F
([deg]C).
[[Page 163]]
T*min,n-1 = the minimum water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
6.1.3 Recovery Efficiency. The recovery efficiency for gas, oil, and
heat pump storage-type water heaters is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.007
Where:
M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is being
measured,
M1 = V1 [rho]1
Where:
V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho]1 = density of the water at the water temperature
measured at the point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water,
(Tdel,1 + Tin,1) 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg [deg]C).
Tdel,1 = average water outlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin,1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho]2 = density of stored hot water, (Tmax,1 +
To)/2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp2 = specific heat of stored hot water evaluated at
(Tmax,1 + To) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/
kg2 [deg]C).
Tmax,1 = maximum mean tank temperature recorded after cut-out
following the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F
([deg]C).
To = maximum mean tank temperature recorded prior to the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw,
including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu
(kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to thermal energy
using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed
heating elements is assumed to be 98%.
6.1.4 Hourly Standby Losses. The hourly standby energy losses are
computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.008
Where:
Qhr = the hourly standby energy losses of the water
heater, Btu/h (kJ/h).
Qstby = the total energy consumed by the water heater between
the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after
the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour test period, Btu (kJ).
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho] = density of stored hot water, (T24 + Tsu) /
2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (T24 +
Tsu) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).
T24 = the mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tsu = the maximum mean tank temperature observed after the
sixth draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
[tau]stby, 1 = elapsed time between the time at which the
maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the
end of the 24-hour simulated use test, h.
The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.009
Where:
UA = standby heat loss coefficient of the storage tank, Btu/h/[deg]F
(kJ/h/[deg]C).
Qhr = as defined in this section.
Tt, stby,1= overall average storage tank temperature between
the time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the
sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F
([deg]C).
Ta, stby,1= overall average ambient temperature between the
time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth
draw and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
6.1.5 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water
heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.010
Where:
[[Page 164]]
Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated
use test including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans,
etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to
thermal energy using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.
[rho]= density of the stored hot water, (T24 + To)
/ 2, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (T24 +
To) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).
T24 = mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
To = mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hour
simulated use test, recorded one minute before the first draw is
initiated, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
6.1.6 Adjusted Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The adjusted
daily water heating energy consumption, Qda, takes into
account that the temperature difference between the storage tank and
surrounding ambient air may not be the nominal value of 67.5 [deg]F (135
[deg]F-67.5 [deg]F) or 37.5 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-19.7 [deg]C) due to the
10 [deg]F (5.6 [deg]C) allowable variation in storage tank temperature,
135 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C), and the 5 [deg]F
(2.8 [deg]C) allowable variation in surrounding ambient temperature 65
[deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) to 70 [deg]F (21.1 [deg]C). The adjusted daily
water heating energy consumption is computed as:
Qda = QD - [(Tstby, 2 - Ta, stby,2) - (135 [deg]F - 67.5 [deg]F)]
UA[tau]stby, 2
or Qda = QD - [(Tstby, 2 - Ta, stby, 2) - (57.2 [deg]C - 19.7 [deg]C)]
UA[tau]stby, 2
Where:
Qda = the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption,
Btu (kJ).
Qd = as defined in section 6.1.5.
Tstby, 2 = the mean tank temperature during the total standby
portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Ta, stby, 2 = the average ambient temperature during the
total standby portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test, [deg]F
([deg]C).
UA = as defined in section 6.1.4.
[tau]stby, 2 = the number of hours during the 24-hour
simulated test when water is not being withdrawn from the water heater.
A modification is also needed to take into account that the
temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply
water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77
[deg]F (135 [deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C).
The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.011
Where:
Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb
(kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb/
[deg]F (kJ/kg/ [deg]C).
Tdel, i = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, i = the average water inlet temperature measured during
the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.012
The difference between these two values is:
QHWD = QHW, 77[deg]-F -QHW
or QHWD = QHW,42.8[deg]-F -QHW
which must be added to the adjusted daily water heating energy
consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes
into account that the temperature difference between the storage tank
and ambient temperature may not be 67.5 [deg]F (37.5 [deg]C) and that
the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8
[deg]C) is:
Qdm = Qda + QHWD
6.1.7 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.013
or
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.014
Where:
Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).
Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb
(kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg [deg]C).
6.1.8 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for
storage-type and heat pump water heaters is computed as:
Eannual = 365 x Qdm
Where:
Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).
365 = the number of days in a year.
[[Page 165]]
6.2 Instantaneous Water Heaters.
6.2.1 Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating Computation. Compute the maximum
gpm (L/min) rating as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.015
which may be expressed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.016
Where:
M10m = the mass of water collected during the 10-minute test,
lb (kg).
Tdel = the average delivery temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin = the average inlet temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).
[rho] = the density of water at the average delivery temperature, lb/gal
(kg/L).
If a water meter is used the maximum gpm (L/min) rating is computed
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.017
Where:
V10m = the volume of water measured during the 10-minute
test, gal (L).
Tdel = as defined in this section.
Tin = as defined in this section.
6.2.2 Recovery Efficiency
6.2.2.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. The recovery
efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.018
Where:
M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is being
measured,
M1 = V1. [rho]
Where:
V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho]= density of the water at the water temperature measured at the
point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal (kg/L).
Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water,
(Tdel,1 + Tin,1) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg
[deg]C).
Tdel, 1 = average water outlet temperature measured during
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, 1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw,
including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu
(kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be converted to thermal energy
using the following conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
6.2.2.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. For
instantaneous water heaters that have a variable firing rate, two
recovery efficiency values are computed, one at the maximum input rate
and one at the minimum input rate. The recovery efficiency used in
subsequent computations is taken as the average of these two values. The
maximum recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.019
Where:
M1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Cp1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Tdel, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Tin, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.
Qr, max = the total energy used by the water heater between
burner cut-out prior to the first draw and burner cut-out following the
first draw, including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, Btu (kJ).
The minimum recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.020
Where:
M4 = the mass withdrawn during the fourth draw, lb (kg), or,
if the volume of water is being measured,
M4 = V4 [rho]
Where:
V4 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).
[rho] = as defined in 6.2.2.1
[[Page 166]]
Cp4 = the specific heat of water, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg
[deg]C).
Tdel, 4 = the average delivery temperature for the fourth
draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin, 4 = the average inlet temperature for the fourth draw,
[deg]F ([deg]C).
Qr, min = the total energy consumed between the beginning of
the fourth draw and burner cut-out following the fourth draw, including
auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, Btu (kJ).
The recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.021
Where:
[eta]r,max = as calculated above.
[eta]r,min = as calculated above.
6.2.3 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water
heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as:
Qd = Q
Where:
Q = the energy used by the instantaneous water heater during the 24-hr
simulated use test.
A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature
difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water
temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (135
[deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The
following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 [deg]F
(42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water may be computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.022
Where:
Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).
Tdel,i = the average delivery temperature of the ith draw,
[deg]F ([deg]C).
Tin,i = the average inlet temperature of the ith draw, [deg]F
([deg]C).
[eta]r = as calculated in section 6.2.2.2.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77
[deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.023
Where:
Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).
[eta]r = as calculated above.
The difference between these two values is:
QHWD = QHW, 77 [deg]F - QHW
or QHWD = QHW, 42.8 [deg]C - QHW
which much be added to the daily water heating energy consumption value.
Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes into account that
the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8
[deg]C) is:
Qdm = Qd + QHWD
6.2.4 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.024
Where:
Qdm = the daily water heating energy consumption as computed
in accordance with section 6.2.3, Btu (kJ).
Mi = the mass associated with the ith draw, lb (kg).
Cpi = the specific heat of water computed at a temperature of
(58 [deg]F + 135 [deg]F) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F [(14.4 [deg]C + 57.2 [deg]C)
/ 2, kJ/kg [deg]C].
6.2.5 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for
instantaneous type water heaters is computed as:
Eannual = 365 x Qdm
Where:
Qdm = the modified daily energy consumption, Btu/day (kJ/
day).
365 = the number of days in a year.
7. Ratings for Untested Models
In order to relieve the test burden on manufacturers who offer water
heaters which differ only in fuel type or power input, ratings for
untested models may be established in accordance with the following
procedures. In lieu of the following procedures a manufacturer may elect
to test the unit for which a rating is sought.
7.1 Gas Water Heaters. Ratings obtained for gas water heaters using
natural gas can be used for an identical water heater which utilizes
propane gas if the input ratings are within +- 10%.
7.2 Electric Water Heaters
7.2.1 First-Hour Rating. If an electric storage-type water heater is
available with more
[[Page 167]]
than one input rating, the manufacturer shall designate the standard
input rating, and the water heater need only be tested with heating
elements at the designated standard input ratings. The first-hour
ratings for units having power input rating less than the designated
standard input rating shall be assigned a first-hour rating equivalent
to the first draw of the first-hour rating for the electric water heater
with the standard input rating. For units having power inputs greater
than the designated standard input rating, the first-hour rating shall
be equivalent to that measured for the water heater with the standard
input rating.
7.2.2 Energy Factor. The energy factor for identical electric
storage-type water heaters, with the exception of heating element
wattage, may use the energy factor obtained during testing of the water
heater with the designated standard input rating.
[63 FR 26008, May 11, 1998; 63 FR 38738, July 20, 1998]
Effective Date Note: At 66 FR 4497, Jan. 17, 2001, Appendix E to
Subpart B of Part 430 was amended in Section 1 by adding paragraph 1.16,
effective Jan. 20, 2004. For the convenience of the user, the added text
follows:
Appendix E to subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters
1. Definitions
* * * * *
1.16 Tabletop water heater means a water heater in a rectangular box
enclosure designed to slide into a kitchen countertop space with typical
dimensions of 36 inches high, 25 inches deep and 24 inches wide.
* * * * *
Appendix F to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Room Air Conditioners
1. Test method. The test method for testing room air conditioners
shall consist of application of the methods and conditions in American
National Standard (ANS) Z234.1-1972, ``Room Air Conditioners,'' sections
4, 5, 6.1, and 6.5, and in American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air Conditioning in Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 16-69, ``Method of
Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners.''
2. Test conditions. Establish the test conditions described in
sections 4 and 5 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 16-69.
3. Measurements. Measure the quantities delineated in section 5 of
ANS Z234.1-1972.
4. Calculations. 4.1 Calculate the cooling capacity (expressed in
Btu/hr) as required in section 6.1 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance
with ASHRAE Standard 16-69.
4.2 Determine the electrical power input (expressed in watts) as
required by section 6.5 of ANS Z234.1-1972 and in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 16-69.
[42 FR 27898, June 1, 1977. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938,
June 29, 1979]
Appendix G to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Unvented Home Heating Equipment
1. Testing conditions.
1.1 Installation.
1.1.1 Electric heater. Install heater according to manufacturer's
instructions. Heaters shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit
of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter installed in the circuit. The
wattmeter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent.
1.1.2 Unvented gas heater. Install heater according to
manufacturer's instructions. Heaters shall be connected to a gas supply
line with a gas displacement meter installed between the supply line and
the heater according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas
displacement meter shall have a maximum error not greater than one
percent. Gas heaters with electrical auxiliaries shall be connected to
an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter
installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum error not
greater than one percent.
1.1.3 Unvented oil heater. Install heater according to
manufacturer's instructions. Oil heaters with electric auxiliaries shall
be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a
wattmeter installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum
error not greater than one percent.
1.2 Temperature regulating controls. All temperature regulating
controls shall be shorted out of the circuit or adjusted so that they
will not operate during the test period.
1.3 Fan controls. All fan controls shall be set at the highest fan
speed setting.
1.4 Energy supply.
1.4.1 Electrical supply. Supply power to the heater within one
percent of the nameplate voltage.
1.4.2 Natural gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing
natural gas, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet
test pressure immediately ahead of all
[[Page 168]]
controls at 7 to 10 inches of water column. The regulator outlet
pressure at normal supply test pressure shall be approximately that
recommended by the manufacturer. The natural gas supplied should have a
higher heating value within +- 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard
cubic foot. Determine the higher heating value, in Btu's per standard
cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the test, with an error no
greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using
``bottled'' natural gas of a higher heating value within +- 5 percent of
1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot as long as the actual higher heating
value of the bottled natural gas has been determined with an error no
greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
1.4.3 Propane gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing
propane, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet test
pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to 13 inches of water
column. The regulator outlet pressure at normal supply test pressure
shall be that recommended by the manufacturer. The propane supplied
should have a higher heating value of within+- 5 percent of 2,500 Btu's
per standard cubic foot. Determine the higher heating value in Btu's per
standard foot, for the propane to be used in the test, with an error no
greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using
``bottled'' propane of a higher heating value within +- 5 percent of
2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot as long as the actual higher heating
value of the bottled propane has been determined with an error no
greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
1.4.4 Oil supply. For an unvented oil heater utilizing kerosene,
determine the higher heating value in Btu's per gallon with an error no
greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using
a tested fuel of a higher heating value within +- 5 percent of 137,400
Btu's per gallon as long as the actual higher heating value of the
tested fuel has been determined with an error no greater than one
percent as certified by the supplier.
1.5 Energy flow instrumentation. Install one or more energy flow
instruments which measure, as appropriate and with an error no greater
than one percent, the quantity of electrical energy, natural gas,
propane gas, or oil supplied to the heater.
2. Testing and measurements.
2.1 Electric power measurement. Establish the test conditions set
forth in section 1 of this appendix. Allow an electric heater to warm up
for at least five minutes before recording the maximum electric power
measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum electric power
(PE) expressed in kilowatts.
Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a forced air unvented gas,
propane, or oil heater to operate for at least five minutes before
recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the
wattmeter. Record the maximum auxiliary electric power (PA)
expressed in kilowatts.
2.2 Natural gas, propane, and oil measurement. Establish the test
conditions as set forth in section 1 of this appendix. A natural gas,
propane, or oil heater shall be operated for one hour. Using either the
nameplate rating or the energy flow instrumentation set forth in section
1.5 of this appendix and the fuel supply rating set forth in sections
1.4.2, 1.4.3, or 1.4.4 of this appendix, as appropriate, determine the
maximum fuel input (PF) of the heater under test in Btu's per
hour. The energy flow instrumentation shall measure the maximum fuel
input with an error no greater than one percent.
3. Calculations.
3.1 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters. For
primary electric heaters, calculate the annual energy consumption
(EE) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as:
EE=2080(0.77)DHR
where:
2080=national average annual heating load hours
0.77=adjustment factor
DHR=design heating requirement and is equal to PE /1.2 in
kilowatts.
PE=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix
1.2=typical oversizing factor for primary electric heaters
3.2 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters by
geographic region of the United States. For primary electric heaters,
calculate the annual energy consumption by geographic region of the
United States (ER) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and
defined as:
ER=HLH(0.77) (DHR)
where:
HLH=heating load hours for a specific region determined from Figure 1 of
this appendix in hours
0.77=as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
3.3 Rated output for electric heaters. Calculate the rated output
(Qout) for electric heaters, expressed in Btu's per hour, and
defined as:
Qout=PE (3,412 Btu/kWh)
where:
PE=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix
3.4 Rated output for unvented heaters using either natural gas,
propane, or oil. For
[[Page 169]]
unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil equipped
without auxiliary electrical systems, the rated output
(Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, is equal to
PF, as determined in section 2.2 of this appendix.
For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil
equipped with auxiliary electrical systems, calculate the rated output
(Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, and defined as:
Qout=PF+PA (3,412 Btu/kWh)
where:
PF=as defined in 2.2 of this appendix in Btu/hr
PA=as defined in 2.1 of this appendix in Btu/hr
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.002
(Energy Policy and Conservation Act, Pub. L. 94-163, as amended by Pub.
L. 94-385; Federal Energy Administration Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93-275, as
amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Department of Energy Organization Act, Pub.
L. 95-91; E.O. 11790, 39 FR 23185)
[43 FR 20132, May 10, 1978. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938,
June 29, 1979; 49 FR 12157, Mar. 28, 1984]
[[Page 170]]
Appendix H to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Television Sets
1. definitions
1.1 ``IRE-unit flat field'' means a specific video electrical signal
which results in a particular level of brightness of the television
screen as established by the Institute of Radio Engineers.
1.2 ``Filament keep-warm'' means a feature that provides a voltage
to keep vacuum tube and/or picture tube filaments warm for the purpose
of allowing almost instantaneous response to the power control swtich.
1.3 ``Operating time'' (to) means the hours per year during which
the television set is operating with power control turned on.
1.4 ``Remote control'' means an optional feature which allows the
user to control the television set from more than one location by a hand
held device.
1.5 ``Standby power consumption'' (Ps) means the minimum amount of
energy consumed with the power control switch turned off.
1.6 ``Standby time'' (ts) means the hours per year during which the
television set is connected to a power outlet with the power control
switch turned off.
1.7 ``Vacation switch or master on-off switch'' means an optional
energy saving feature incorporated into the design of a television set
that permits the user to disconnect the filament keep-warm circuit(s).
1.8 ``Remote control defeat switch'' means a switch which permits
the user to disconnect all standby power to a television set.
2. testing conditions and measurements
2.1 Test equipment and test signals. The following equipment and
test signals shall be used for testing of television sets.
2.1.1 Regulated power source capable of supplying 120 volts (+-1.2
volts) alternating current.
2.1.2 Signal generator capable of producing radio frequency (RF)
television test signals, at a convenient very high frequency (VHF)
channel, modulated with, National Television System Committee composite
video as follows:
2.1.2.1 Standard White Pattern, RF signal modulated to 87 percent
with a 100 IRE-unit flat field.
2.1.2.2 Standard Black Pattern, all adjustments as for 2.1.2.1
except modulated with a zero IRE-unit flat field.
2.1.2.3 The test signals in 2.1.2.1 and 2.1.2.2, supplied by a
source whose impedance equals the design antenna impedance of the
television set under test, shall be adjusted to a level of 70 decibels
(dB) +-3dB, referred to a zero dB level of one femtowatt (1x10-15 watt)
available power. (For a 300 ohm source, 70 dB referred to one femtowatt
corresponds to an open-circuit voltage of 3.5 millivolts. For the
calculation of ``available power'' use American National Standard
C.16.13-1961, Method of Testing Monochrome Television Broadcast
Receivers.)
2.1.3 Wattmeter capable of measuring the average power consumption
of the television set under test. The wattmeter shall be accurate to
within 1 percent of the full scale value. All measurements shall be made
on the upper half of the scale of the wattmeter.
2.2 Initial set-up of television set.
2.2.1 Remove all batteries from television sets designed for both
battery and alternating current operation. Deactivate all present or
automatic controls affecting brightness which are customer options.
Adjust all non-customer controls according to the manufacturer's service
procedure.
2.2.2 Apply power to the television set under test from the power
source specified in 2.1.1 through the wattmeter specified in 2.1.3.
Adjust the volume control to the lowest possible setting.
2.2.3 Connect the output of the signal generator as specified in
2.1.2 to the VHF antenna terminals of the television set. Tune the
television set to the channel of the RF signal.
2.3 Measurement of operating power consumption (Po)
2.3.1 Turn on the television set and allow at least five minutes
warm-up time. With the synchronization controls adjusted for a stable
test pattern, apply the standard white pattern specified in 2.1.2.1 to
the television set. Adjust any customer controls other than the volume
or synchronization controls for maximum power consumption as indicated
by the wattmeter specified in 2.1.3. Illuminate any room illuminance
sensor which has not been deactivated, to produce maximum power
consumption. Record the white pattern consumption (Pw) as indicated by
the wattmeter in watts.
2.3.2 Change the signal source to the standard black pattern
specified in 2.1.2.2. Adjust any customer controls, other than the
volume or synchronization controls, for the minimum power consumption as
indicated by the wattmeter. Cover any room illuminance sensor which has
not been deactivated. Record the black pattern power consumption (Pb) as
indicated by the wattmeter in watts.
2.3.3 Compute the operating power consumption (po) as follows:
Po=(Pw+Pb/2)
where
Po=operating power consumption in watts
Pw=as determined from 2.3.1
Pb=as determined from 2.3.2
2.2 Measurements of standby power consumption (Ps)
[[Page 171]]
2.4.1 For television sets without either a vacation switch or a
remote control defeat switch, turn the power switch off and after two
minutes measure the standby power consumption (P).
2.4.2 For a television set equipped with a remote control defeat
switch, a vacation switch or both, turn the power switch, any vacation
switch, and any remote er consumptions, (Pmax).The standby power is then
calculated from the equation:
Ps=[(Pmax-Pmin)/2]+Pmin
where
Ps=standby power consumption in watts
Pmax=power consumption, in watts, measured with the
television set power switch off and the vacation switch and remote
control defeat switch in the highest energy consuming position.
Pmin=power consumption, in watts, measured with the
television set power switch off and the vacation switch and remote
control defeat switch in the lowest energy consuming position.
3.0 Average Annual Energy Consumption
E=(Poto/1,000)+(Psts/1,000)=2.2Po+6.56Ps
where
E=total average energy consumed by the television set (kilowatt-hour per
year)
Po=operating power consumption as computed in 2.3.3
to=operating time, 2,200 h/yr
Ps=standby power consumption computed in 2.4
ts=standby time, 6,560 h/yr
[42 FR 46154, Sept. 14, 1977. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938,
June 29, 1979]
Appendix I to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Conventional Ranges, Conventional Cooking
Tops, Conventional Ovens, and Microwave Ovens
1. Definitions
1.1 Built-in means the product is supported by surrounding
cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
1.2 Drop-in means the product is supported by horizontal surface
cabinetry.
1.3 Forced convection means a mode of conventional oven operation in
which a fan is used to circulate the heated air within the oven
compartment during cooking.
1.4 Freestanding means the product is not supported by surrounding
cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
1.5 IEC 705 refers to the test standard published by the
International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``Method for
Measuring the Performance of Microwave Ovens for Household and Similar
Purposes,'' Publication 705-1988 and Amendment 2--1993. (See 10 CFR
430.22)
1.6 Normal nonoperating temperature means the temperature of all
areas of an appliance to be tested are within 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) of
the temperature that the identical areas of the same basic model of the
appliance would attain if it remained in the test room for 24 hours
while not operating with all oven doors closed and with any gas pilot
lights on and adjusted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 Primary energy consumption means either the electrical energy
consumption of a conventional electric oven or the gas energy
consumption of a conventional gas oven.
1.8 Secondary energy consumption means any electrical energy
consumption, other than clock energy consumption, of a conventional gas
oven.
1.9 Standard cubic foot (L) of gas means that quantity of gas that
occupies 1 cubic foot (L) when saturated with water vapor at a
temperature of 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C) and a pressure of 30 inches of
mercury (101.6 kPa) (density of mercury equals 13.595 grams per cubic
centimeter).
1.10 Thermocouple means a device consisting of two dissimilar metals
which are joined together and, with their associated wires, are used to
measure temperature by means of electromotive force.
1.11 Symbol Usage. The following identity relationships are provided
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure.
A--Number of Hours in a Year
B--Number of Hours Pilot Light Contributes to Cooking
C--Specific Heat
E--Energy Consumed
Eff--Cooking Efficiency
H--Heating Value of Gas
K--Conversion for Watt-hours to Kilowatt hours
Ke--3.412 Btu/Wh, Conversion for Watt-hours to Btu's
M--Mass
n--Number of Units
O--Annual Useful Cooking Energy Output
P--Power
Q--Gas Flow Rate
R--Energy Factor, Ratio of useful Cooking Energy Output to Total Energy
Input
S--Number of Self Cleaning Operations per Year
T--Temperature
t--Time
V--Volume of Gas Consumed
W--Weight of Test Block
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Installation. A free standing kitchen range shall be installed
with the back directly against, or as near as possible to, a
[[Page 172]]
vertical wall which extends at least 1 foot above and on either side of
the appliance. There shall be no side walls. A drop-in, built-in or
wall-mounted appliance shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. These appliances are to be
completely assembled with all handles, knobs, guards and the like
mounted in place. Any electric resistance heaters, gas burners, baking
racks, and baffles shall be in place in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions; however, broiler pans are to be removed
from the oven's baking compartment. Disconnect any electrical clock
which uses energy continuously, except for those that are an integral
part of the timing or temperature controlling circuit of the oven,
cooktop, or microwave oven. Do not disconnect or modify the circuit to
any other electrical devices or features.
2.1.1 Conventional electric ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These
products shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit with voltage
as specified in Section 2.2.1 with a watt-hour meter installed in the
circuit. The watt-hour meter shall be as described in Section 2.9.1.1.
2.1.2 Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These
products shall be connected to a gas supply line with a gas meter
installed between the supply line and the appliance being tested,
according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas meter shall be as
described in Section 2.9.2. Conventional gas ranges, ovens and cooking
tops with electrical ignition devices or other electrical components
shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage
with a watt-hour meter installed in the circuit. The watt-hour meter
shall be as described in Section 2.9.1.1.
2.1.3 Microwave ovens. Install the microwave oven in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and connect to an electrical supply
circuit with voltage as specified in Section 2.2.1. A watt-hour meter
and watt meter shall be installed in the circuit and shall be as
described in Section 2.9.1.1 and 2.9.1.2. If trial runs are needed to
set the ``on'' time for the test, the test measurements are to be
separated according to Section 4, Paragraph 12.6 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
(See 10 CFR 430.22)
2.2 Energy supply.
2.2.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply to the
conventional range, conventional cooking top, and conventional oven
being tested at 240/120 volts except that basic models rated only at
208/120 volts shall be tested at that rating. Maintain the voltage
within 2 percent of the above specified voltages. For the microwave oven
testing, however, maintain the electrical supply to a microwave oven at
120 volts +-1 volt and at 60 hertz.
2.2.2 Gas supply.
2.2.2.1 Gas burner adjustments. Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and
cooking tops shall be tested with all of the gas burners adjusted in
accordance with the installation or operation instructions provided by
the manufacturer. In every case, the burner must be adjusted with
sufficient air flow to prevent a yellow flame or a flame with yellow
tips.
2.2.2.2 Natural gas. For testing convertible cooking appliances or
appliances which are designed to operate using only natural gas,
maintain the natural gas pressure immediately ahead of all controls of
the unit under test at 7 to 10 inches of water column (1743.6 to 2490.8
Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the manufacturer's
recommendation. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of
approximately 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot (38.2 kJ/L). The
actual gross heating value, Hn, in Btu's per standard cubic
foot (kJ/L), for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be
obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting
the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in
Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled natural gas whose gross heating
value is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the
requirements in Section 2.9.4.
2.2.2.3 Propane. For testing convertible cooking appliances with
propane or for testing appliances which are designed to operate using
only LP-gas, maintain the propane pressure immediately ahead of all
controls of the unit under test at 11 to 13 inches of water column (2740
to 3238 Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the
manufacturer's recommendation. The propane supplied should have a
heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot (93.2
kJ/L). The actual gross heating value, Hp, in Btu's per
standard cubic foot (kJ/L), for the propane to be used in the test shall
be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting
the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in
Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled propane whose gross heating value
is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the
requirements described in Section 2.9.4.
2.2.2.4 Test gas. A basic model of a convertible cooking appliance
shall be tested with natural gas, but may also be tested with propane.
Any basic model of a conventional range, conventional cooking top, or
conventional oven which is designed to operate using only natural gas as
the energy source must be tested with natural gas. Any basic model of a
conventional range, conventional cooking top, or conventional oven which
is designed to operate using only LP gas as the gas energy source must
be tested with propane gas.
[[Page 173]]
2.3 Air circulation. Maintain air circulation in the room sufficient
to secure a reasonably uniform temperature distribution, but do not
cause a direct draft on the unit under test.
2.4 Setting the conventional oven thermostat.
2.4.1 Conventional electric oven. Install a thermocouple
approximately in the center of the usable baking space. Provide a
temperature indicator system for measuring the oven's temperature with
an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does
not cycle on and off, adjust or determine the conventional electric oven
thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is
325[deg]+-5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] +-2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room
ambient air temperature. If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on
and off, adjust or determine the conventional electric oven thermostat
setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 325[deg] +-5
[deg]F (180.6[deg]+-2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air
temperature. This shall be done by measuring the maximum and minimum
temperatures in any three consecutive cut-off/cut-on actions of the
electric resistance heaters, excluding the initial cut-off/cut-on
action, by the thermostat after the temperature rise of 325[deg]+-5
[deg]F (180.6[deg] +-2.8 [deg]C) has been attained by the conventional
electric oven. Remove the thermocouple after the thermostat has been
set.
2.4.2 Conventional gas oven. Install five parallel-connected
weighted thermocouples, one located at the center of the conventional
gas oven's usable baking space and the other four equally spaced between
the center and the corners of the conventional gas oven on the diagonals
of a horizontal plane through the center of the conventional gas oven.
Each weighted thermocouple shall be constructed of a copper disc that is
1-inch (25.4 mm) in diameter and \1/8\-inch (3.2 mm) thick. The two
thermocouple wires shall be located in two holes in the disc spaced \1/
2\-inch (12.7 mm) apart, with each hole being located \1/4\-inch (6.4
mm) from the center of the disc. Both thermocouple wires shall be
silver-soldered to the copper disc. Provide a temperature indicator
system for measuring the oven's temperature with an accuracy as
indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does not cycle on
or off, adjust or determine the conventional gas oven thermostat setting
to provide an average internal temperature which is 325 [deg]+-5 [deg]F
(180.6 [deg]+-2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature.
If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, adjust or
determine the conventional gas oven thermostat setting to provide an
average internal temperature which is 325[deg]+-5 [deg]F (180.6+-2.8
[deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature. This shall be done
by measuring the maximum and minimum temperatures in any three
consecutive cut-off/cut-on actions of the gas burners, excluding the
initial cut-off/cut-on action, by the thermostat after the temperature
rise of 325[deg]+-5 [deg]F (180.6 [deg]+-2.8 [deg]C) has been attained
by the conventional gas oven. Remove the thermocouples after the
thermostat has been set.
2.5 Ambient room air temperature. During the test, maintain an
ambient room air temperature, TR, of 77[deg]+-9 [deg]F
(25[deg]+-5 [deg]C) for conventional ovens and cooking tops, or as
indicated in Section 4, Paragraph 12.4 of IEC 705 Amendment 2 for
microwave ovens, as measured at least 5 feet (1.5 m) and not more than 8
feet (2.4 m) from the nearest surface of the unit under test and
approximately 3 feet (0.9 m) above the floor. The temperature shall be
measured with a thermometer or temperature indicating system with an
accuracy as specified in Section 2.9.3.1.
2.6 Normal nonoperating temperature. All areas of the appliance to
be tested shall attain the normal nonoperating temperature, as defined
in Section 1.6, before any testing begins. The equipment for measuring
the applicable normal nonoperating temperature shall be as described in
Sections 2.9.3.1, 2.9.3.2, 2.9.3.3, 2.9.3.4, and 2.9.3.5, as applicable.
2.7 Test blocks for conventional oven and cooking top. The test
blocks shall be made of aluminum alloy No. 6061, with a specific heat of
0.23 Btu/lb- [deg]F (0.96 kJ/[kg / [deg]C]) and with any temper that
will give a czoefficient of thermal conductivity of 1073.3 to 1189.1
Btu-in/h-ft\2\- [deg]F (154.8 to 171.5 W/[m / [deg]C]). Each block shall
have a hole at its top. The hole shall be 0.08 inch (2.03 mm) in
diameter and 0.80 inch (20.3 mm) deep. The manufacturer conducting the
test may provide other means which will ensure that the thermocouple
junction is installed at this same position and depth.
The bottom of each block shall be flat to within 0.002 inch (0.051
mm) TIR (total indicator reading). Determine the actual weight of each
test block with a scale with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.5.
2.7.1 Conventional oven test block. The test block for the
conventional oven, W1, shall be 6.25+-0.05 inches (158.8+-1.3
mm) in diameter, approximately 2.8 inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh
8.5+-0.1 lbs (3.86+-0.05 kg). The block shall be finished with an anodic
black coating which has a minimum thickness of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) or
with a finish having the equivalent absorptivity.
2.7.2 Small test block for conventional cooking top. The small test
block, W2, shall be 6.25+-0.05 inches (158.8+-1.3 mm) in
diameter, approximately 2.8 inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh 8.5+-0.1
lbs (3.86+-0.05 kg).
2.7.3 Large test block for conventional cooking top. The large test
block for the conventional cooking top, W3, shall be 9+-0.05
inches (228.6+-1.3 mm) in diameter, approximately 3.0 inches (76 mm)
high and shall weigh 19+-0.1 lbs (8.62+-0.05 kg).
[[Page 174]]
2.7.4 Thermocouple installation. Install the thermocouple such that
the thermocouple junction (where the thermocouple contacts the test
block) is at the bottom of the hole provided in the test block and that
the thermocouple junction makes good thermal contact with the aluminum
block. If the test blocks are to be water cooled between tests the
thermocouple hole should be sealed, or other steps taken, to insure that
the thermocouple hole is completely dry at the start of the next test.
Provide a temperature indicator system for measuring the test block
temperature with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.3.
2.7.5 Initial test block temperature. Maintain the initial
temperature of the test blocks, TI, within +-4 [deg]F (+-2.2
[deg]C) of the ambient room air temperature as specified in Section 2.5.
If the test block has been cooled (or heated) to bring it to room
temperature, allow the block to stabilize for at least 2 minutes after
removal from the cooling (or heating) source, before measuring its
initial temperature.
2.8 Microwave oven test load.
2.8.1 Test container. The test container shall be as specified in
Section 4, Paragraph 12.2 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
2.8.2 Test water load. The test water load shall be as specified in
Section 4, Paragraph 12.1 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
2.8.2.1 Test water load and test container temperature. Before the
start of the test, the oven and the test container shall be at ambient
temperature as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.4 of IEC 705
Amendment 2. The test water load shall be contained in a chiller (not
the test container) and maintained at 18[deg] +- 1.8 [deg]F (10[deg] +-
1 [deg]C) below the ambient room temperature.
2.9 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the
following instruments, as appropriate:
2.9.1 Electrical Measurements.
2.9.1.1 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter for measuring the
electrical energy consumption of conventional ovens and cooking tops
shall have a resolution of 1 watt-hour (3.6 kJ) or less and a maximum
error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value for any demand
greater than 100 watts. The watt-hour meter for measuring the energy
consumption of microwave ovens shall have a resolution of 0.1 watt-hour
(0.36 kJ) or less and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the
measured value.
2.9.1.2 Watt meter. The watt meter used to measure the conventional
oven, conventional range, range clock power or the power input of the
microwave oven shall have a resolution of 0.2 watt (0.2 J/s) or less and
a maximum error no greater than 5 percent of the measured value.
2.9.2 Gas Measurements.
2.9.2.1 Positive displacement meters. The gas meter to be used for
measuring the gas consumed by the gas burners of the oven or cooking top
shall have a resolution of 0.01 cubic foot (0.28 L) or less and a
maximum error no greater than 1 percent of the measured value for any
demand greater than 2.2 cubic feet per hour (62.3 L/h). If a positive
displacement gas meter is used for measuring the gas consumed by the
pilot lights, it shall have a resolution of at least 0.01 cubic foot
(0.28 L) or less and have a maximum error no greater than 2 percent of
the measured value.
2.9.2.2 Flow meter. If a gas flow meter is used for measuring the
gas consumed by the pilot lights, it shall be calibrated to have a
maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value and a
resolution of 1 percent or less of the measured value.
2.9.3 Temperature measurement equipment.
2.9.3.1 Room temperature indicating system. The room temperature
indicating system shall be as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.3 of
IEC 705 Amendment 2 for microwave ovens and Section 2.9.3.5 for ranges,
ovens and cooktops.
2.9.3.2 Temperature indicator system for measuring conventional oven
temperature. The equipment for measuring the conventional oven
temperature shall have an error no greater than +-4 [deg]F (+-2.2
[deg]C) over the range of 65[deg] to 500 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to 260
[deg]C).
2.9.3.3 Temperature indicator system for measuring test block
temperature. The system shall have an error no greater than +-2 [deg]F
(+-1.1 [deg]C) when measuring specific temperatures over the range of
65[deg] to 330 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C to 165.6 [deg]C). It shall also have
an error no greater than +-2 [deg]F (+-1.1 [deg]C) when measuring any
temperature difference up to 240 [deg]F (133.3 [deg]C) within the above
range.
2.9.3.4 Test load temperatures. The thermometer or other temperature
measuring instrument used to measure the test water load temperature
shall be as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 12.3 of IEC 705 Amendment
2. Use only one thermometer or other temperature measuring device
throughout the entire test procedure.
2.9.3.5 Temperature indicator system for measuring surface
temperatures. The temperature of any surface of an appliance shall be
measured by means of a thermocouple in firm contact with the surface.
The temperature indicating system shall have an error no greater than +-
1 [deg]F (+-0.6[deg]C) over the range 65[deg] to 90 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to
32 [deg]C).
2.9.4 Heating Value. The heating value of the natural gas or propane
shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that
has a maximum error no greater than +-0.5% of the measured value and a
resolution of +-0.2% or less of the full scale reading of the indicator
instrument. The heating
[[Page 175]]
value of natural gas or propane must be corrected for local temperature
and pressure conditions.
2.9.5 Scale. The scale used for weighing the test blocks shall have
a maximum error no greater than 1 ounce (28.4 g). The scale used for
weighing the microwave oven test water load shall be as specified in
Section 4, paragraph 12.3 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
3. Test Methods and Measurements
3.1 Test methods.
3.1.1 Conventional oven. Perform a test by establishing the testing
conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this
Appendix, and adjust any pilot lights of a conventional gas oven in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas
flow to the conventional cooking top, if so equipped. Before beginning
the test, the conventional oven shall be at its normal nonoperating
temperature as defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Set
the conventional oven test block W1 approximately in the
center of the usable baking space. If there is a selector switch for
selecting the mode of operation of the oven, set it for normal baking.
If an oven permits baking by either forced convection by using a fan, or
without forced convection, the oven is to be tested in each of those two
modes. The oven shall remain on for at least one complete thermostat
``cut-off/cut-on'' of the electrical resistance heaters or gas burners
after the test block temperature has increased 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C)
above its initial temperature.
3.1.1.1 Self-cleaning operation of a conventional oven. Establish
the test conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this
Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a conventional gas oven in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas
flow to the conventional cooking top. The temperature of the
conventional oven shall be its normal nonoperating temperature as
defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Then set the
conventional oven's self-cleaning process in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. If the self-cleaning process is adjustable,
use the average time recommended by the manufacturer for a moderately
soiled oven.
3.1.1.2 Continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas
oven. Establish the test conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST
CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a
conventional gas oven in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and turn off the gas flow to the conventional cooking top. If a positive
displacement gas meter is used the, test duration shall be sufficient to
measure a gas consumption which is at least 200 times the resolution of
the gas meter.
3.1.2 Conventional cooking top. Establish the test conditions set
forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any
pilot lights of a conventional gas cooking top in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and turn off the gas flow to the
conventional oven(s), if so equipped. The temperature of the
conventional cooking top shall be its normal nonoperating temperature as
defined in Section 1.6 and described in Section 2.6. Set the test block
in the center of the surface unit under test. The small test block,
W2, shall be used on electric surface units of 7 inches (178
mm) or less in diameter. The large test block, W3, shall be
used on electric surface units over 7 inches (177.8 mm) in diameter and
on all gas surface units. Turn on the surface unit under test and set
its energy input rate to the maximum setting. When the test block
reaches 144 [deg]F (80 [deg]C) above its initial test block temperature,
immediately reduce the energy input rate to 25+-5 percent of the maximum
energy input rate. After 15+-0.1 minutes at the reduced energy setting,
turn off the surface unit under test.
3.1.2.1 Continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas
cooking top. Establish the test conditions set forth in Section 2,
``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this Appendix. Adjust any pilot lights of a
conventional gas cooking top in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and turn off the gas flow to the conventional oven(s). If a
positive displacement gas meter is used, the test duration shall be
sufficient to measure a gas consumption which is at least 200 times the
resolution of the gas meter.
3.1.3 Microwave oven.
3.1.3.1 Microwave oven test energy or power output. Establish the
testing conditions set forth in Section 2, ``TEST CONDITIONS,'' of this
Appendix. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 4, Paragraph
12.4 of IEC 705 Amendment 2.
3.2 Test measurements.
3.2.1 Conventional oven test energy consumption. If the oven
thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off,
measure the energy consumed, EO, when the temperature of the
block reaches TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C)
above the initial block temperature, TI). If the oven
thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the following series of
measurements: Measure the block temperature, TA, and the
energy consumed, EA, or volume of gas consumed,
VA, at the end of the last ``ON'' period of the conventional
oven before the block reaches TO. Measure the block
temperature, TB, and the energy consumed, EB, or
volume of gas consumed, VB, at the beginning of the next
``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TC, and the
energy consumed, EC, or volume of gas consumed,
VC, at the end of that ``ON'' period. Measure the block
temperature, TD, and the energy consumed, ED, or
volume of gas consumed, VD, at the beginning of the following
``ON'' period. Energy measurements for EO, EA,
EB, EC and ED,
[[Page 176]]
should be expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for conventional electric ovens
and volume measurements for VA, VB, VC
and VD should be expressed in standard cubic feet (L) of gas
for conventional gas ovens. For a gas oven, measure in watt-hours (kJ)
any electrical energy, EIO, consumed by an ignition device or
other electrical components required for the operation of a conventional
gas oven while heating the test block to TO. The energy
consumed by a continuously operating clock that is an integral part of
the timing or temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected
during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy to obtain
the test energy consumption, EO or EIO.
3.2.1.1 Conventional oven average test energy consumption. If the
conventional oven permits baking by either forced convection or without
forced convection and the oven thermostat does not cycle on and off,
measure the energy consumed with the forced convection mode,
(EO)1, and without the forced convection mode,
(EO)2, when the temperature of the block reaches
TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) above the
initial block temperature, TI). If the conventional oven
permits baking by either forced convection or without forced convection
and the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the
following series of measurements with and without the forced convection
mode: Measure the block temperature, TA, and the energy
consumed, EA, or volume of gas consumed, VA, at
the end of the last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the
block reaches TO. Measure the block temperature,
TB, and the energy consumed, EB, or volume of gas
consumed, VB, at the beginning of the next ``ON'' period.
Measure the block temperature, TC, and the energy consumed,
EC, or volume of gas consumed, VC, at the end of
that ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TD, and
the energy consumed, ED, or volume of gas consumed,
VD, at the beginning of the following ``ON'' period. Energy
measurements for EO, EA, EB,
EC and ED should be expressed in watt-hours (kJ)
for conventional electric ovens and volume measurements for
VA, VB, VC and VD should be
expressed in standard cubic feet (L) of gas for conventional gas ovens.
For a gas oven that can be operated with or without forced convection,
measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy consumed by an ignition
device or other electrical components required for the operation of a
conventional gas oven while heating the test block to TO
using the forced convection mode, (EIO)1, and
without using the forced convection mode, (EIO)2.
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that is an
integral part of the timing or temperature control circuit and cannot be
disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy
to obtain the test energy consumption, (EO)1 and
(EO)2 or (EIO)1 and
(EIO)2.
3.2.1.2 Energy consumption of self-cleaning operation. Measure the
energy consumption, ES, in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or
the volume of gas consumption, VS, in standard cubic feet (L)
during the self-cleaning test set forth in Section 3.1.1.1. For a gas
oven, also measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy,
EIS, consumed by ignition devices or other electrical
components required during the self-cleaning test. The energy consumed
by a continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing
or temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the
test may be subtracted from the self-cleaning test energy to obtain the
energy consumption, ES or EIS
3.2.1.3 Gas consumption of continuously burning pilot lights.
Measure the gas consumption of the pilot lights, VOP, in
standard cubic feet (L) of gas and the test duration, tOP, in
hours for the test set forth in Section 3.1.1.2. If a gas flow rate
meter is used, measure the flow rate, QOP, in standard cubic
feet per hour (L/h).
3.2.1.4 Clock power. If the conventional oven or conventional range
includes an electric clock which is on continuously, and the power
rating in watts (J/s) of this feature is not known, measure the clock
power, PCL, in watts (J/s.) The power rating or measurement
of continuously operating clocks, that are an integral part of the
timing or temperature control circuits and cannot be disconnected during
testing, shall be multiplied by the applicable test period to calculate
the clock energy consumption, in watt-hours (kJ), during a test. The
energy consumed by the clock during the test may then be subtracted from
the test energy to obtain the specified test energy consumption value.
3.2.2 Conventional surface unit test energy consumption. For the
surface unit under test, measure the energy consumption, ECT,
in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or the volume of gas consumption,
VCT, in standard cubic feet (L) of gas and the test block
temperature, TCT, at the end of the 15 minute (reduced input
setting) test interval for the test specified in Section 3.1.2 and the
total time, tCT, in hours, that the unit is under test.
Measure any electrical energy, EIC, consumed by an ignition
device of a gas heating element in watt-hours (kJ). The energy consumed
by a continuously operating clock that is an integral part of the timing
or temperature control circuit and cannot be disconnected during the
test may be subtracted from the cooktop test energy to obtain the test
energy consumption, ECT or EIC.
3.2.2.1 Gas consumption of continuously burning pilot lights. If the
conventional gas cooking top under test has one or more continuously
burning pilot lights, measure the gas consumed during the test by the
pilot lights, VCP, in standard cubic feet (L) of gas, and the
test duration, tCP, in hours as specified in Section 3.1.2.1.
If a gas flow rate
[[Page 177]]
meter is used, measure the flow rate, QCP, in standard cubic
feet per hour (L/h).
3.2.3 Microwave oven test energy consumption and power input.
Measurements are to be made as specified in Section 4, Paragraphs 12.4
and 13 of IEC 705 and Amendment 2. Measure the electrical input energy,
EM, in watt-hours (kJ) consumed by the microwave oven during
the test. Repeat the tests three times unless the power output value
resulting from the second measurement is within 1.5% of the value
obtained from the first measurement as stated in Section 4, Paragraphs
12.6 of IEC 705 Amendment 2. (See 10 CFR 430.22.)
3.3 Recorded values.
3.3.1 Record the test room temperature, TR, at the start
and end of each range, oven or cooktop test, as determined in Section
2.5.
3.3.2 Record measured test block weights W1,
W2, and W3 in pounds (kg).
3.3.3 Record the initial temperature, T1, of the test
block under test.
3.3.4 For a conventional oven with a thermostat which operates by
cycling on and off, record the conventional oven test measurements
TA, EA, TB, EB,
TC, EC, TD, and ED for
conventional electric ovens or TA, VA,
TB, VB, TC, VC,
TD, and VD for conventional gas ovens. If the
thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off,
record EO. For a gas oven which also uses electrical energy
for the ignition or operation of the oven, also record EIO.
3.3.5 For a conventional oven that can be operated with or without
forced convection and the oven thermostat controls the oven temperature
without cycling on and off, measure the energy consumed with the forced
convection mode, (EO)1, and without the forced
convection mode, (EO)2. If the conventional oven
operates with or without forced convection and the thermostat controls
the oven temperature by cycling on and off, record the conventional oven
test measurements TA, EA, TB,
EB, TC, EC, TD, and
ED for conventional electric ovens or TA,
VA, TB, VB, TC,
VC, TD, and VD for conventional gas
ovens. For a gas oven that can be operated with or without forced
convection, measure any electrical energy consumed by an ignition device
or other electrical components used during the forced convection mode,
(EIO)1, and without using the forced convection
mode, (EIO)2.
3.3.6 Record the measured energy consumption, ES, or gas
consumption, VS, and for a gas oven, any electrical energy,
EIS, for the test of the self-cleaning operation of a
conventional oven.
3.3.7 Record the gas flow rate, QOP; or the gas
consumption, VOP, and the elapsed time, tOP, that
any continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional oven are under
test.
3.3.8 Record the clock power measurement or rating, PCL,
in watts (J/s), except for microwave oven tests.
3.3.9 For the surface unit under test, record the electric energy
consumption, ECT, or the gas volume consumption,
VCT, the final test block temperature, TCT, the
total test time, tCT. For a gas cooking top which uses
electrical energy for ignition of the burners, also record
EIC.
3.3.10 Record the gas flow rate, QCP; or the gas
consumption, VCP, and the elapsed time, tCP, that
any continuously burning pilot lights of a conventional gas cooking top
are under test.
3.3.11 Record the heating value, Hn, as determined in
Section 2.2.2.2 for the natural gas supply.
3.3.12 Record the heating value, Hp, as determined in
Section 2.2.2.3 for the propane supply.
3.3.13 Record the electrical input energy and power input,
EM and PM, for the microwave oven test; the
initial and final temperature, T1 and T2, of the
test water load; the mass of the test container before filling with the
test water load and the mass of the test water load, MC and
MW respectively; and the measured room temperature,
T0; as determined in Section 3.2.3.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Conventional oven.
4.1.1 Test energy consumption. For a conventional oven with a
thermostat which operates by cycling on and off, calculate the test
energy consumption, EO, expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for
electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.000
for electric ovens, and,
[[Page 178]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.001
For gas ovens
Where:
H = either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3,
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
TO = 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) plus the initial test block
temperature.
and,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.002
Where:
TA = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the end of the
last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the test block
reaches TO.
TB = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period following the measurement of TA.
TC = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the end of the
``ON'' period which starts with TB.
TD = block temperature in [deg]F ([deg]C) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of TC.
EA = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the
last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches TO.
EB = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period following the measurement of TA.
EC = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the
``ON'' period which starts with TB.
ED = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of TC.
VA = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
end of the last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches
TO.
VB = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
beginning of the ``ON'' period following the measurement of
TA.
VC = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
end of the ``ON'' period which starts with TB.
VD = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
beginning of the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of
TC.
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be
disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy
to obtain the oven test energy consumption, EO.
4.1.1.1 Average test energy consumption. If the conventional oven
can be operated with or without forced convection, determine the average
test energy consumption, EO and EIO, in watt-hours
(kJ) for electric ovens and Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens using the following
equations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.003
Where:
(EO)1=test energy consumption using the forced
convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ)
for gas ovens as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.
(EO)2=test energy consumption without using the
forced convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in
Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.
(EIO)1=electrical energy consumption in watt-hours
(kJ) of a gas oven in forced convection mode as measured in Section
3.2.1.1. (EIO)2=electrical energy consumption in
watt-hours (kJ) of a gas oven without using the forced convection mode
as measured in Section 3.2.1.1.
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be
disconnected during the test may be subtracted from the oven test energy
to obtain the average test energy consumption EO and
EIO.
4.1.2 Conventional oven annual energy consumption.
4.1.2.1. Annual cooking energy consumption.
4.1.2.1.1. Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual
primary energy consumption for cooking, ECO, expressed in
kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) per
year for gas ovens, and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.004
Where:
[[Page 179]]
E O=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
K e=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh,) conversion factor of watt-hours
to Btu's.
O O=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of conventional electric oven.
W 1=measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).
C p=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg / [deg]C), specific heat
of test block.
T S=234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test block.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.005
Where:
EO=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1. or
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
OO=88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of conventional gas oven.
W1, Cp and TS are the same as defined
above.
4.1.2.1.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas
ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy consumption for cooking,
ESO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined
as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.006
Where:
EIO=electrical test energy consumption as measured in Section
3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.
OO=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
Ke, W1, Cp, and TS are as
defined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
4.1.2.2 Annual energy consumption of any continuously burning pilot
lights. Calculate the annual energy consumption of any continuously
burning pilot lights, EPO, expressed in Btu's (kJ) per year
and defined as:
EPO=QOPxHx(A-B),
or,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.007
Where:
QOP=pilot gas flow rate in standard cubic feet per hour (L/
h), as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
VOP=standard cubic feet (L) of gas consumed by any
continuously burning pilot lights, as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
tOP=elapsed test time in hours for any continuously burning
pilot lights tested, as measured in Section 3.2.1.3.
H=Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas used in
the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3 in Btu's
per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
A=8,760, number of hours in a year.
B=300, number of hours per year any continuously burning pilot lights
contribute to the heating of an oven for cooking food.
4.1.2.3 Annual conventional oven self-cleaning energy.
4.1.2.3.1 Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual
primary energy consumption for conventional oven self-cleaning
operations, ESC, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year
for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as:
ESC=ESxSexK, for electric ovens,
Where:
ES=energy consumption in watt-hours, as measured in Section
3.2.1.2.
Se=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a
conventional electric oven is used per year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
or
ESC=VSxHxSg, for gas ovens,
Where:
VS=gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L), as measured in
Section 3.2.1.2.
H=Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas used in
the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3 in Btu's
per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).
Sg=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a
conventional gas oven is used per year.
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be
disconnected during the self-cleaning test procedure may be subtracted
from the test energy to obtain the test energy consumption,
ESC.
4.1.2.3.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for self-cleaning
operation of gas ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy
consumption for self-cleaning operations of a gas oven, ESS,
expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:
ESS=EIS x Sg x K,
Where:
EIS=electrical energy consumed during the self-cleaning
operation of a conventional gas oven, as measured in Section 3.2.1.2.
Sg=4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of a
conventional gas oven is used per year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
[[Page 180]]
4.1.2.4 Annual clock energy consumption. Calculate the annual energy
consumption of any constantly operating electric clock, ECL,
expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:
ECL = PCL x A x K,
Where:
PCL=power rating of clock which is on continuously, in watts,
as measured in Section 3.2.1.4.
A=8,760, number of hours in a year.
K=0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
4.1.2.5 Total annual energy consumption of a single conventional
oven.
4.1.2.5.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate
the total annual energy consumption of a conventional electric oven,
EAO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined
as:
EAO=ECO+ESC+ECL,
Where:
ECO=annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined
in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
ESC=annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.1.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section
4.1.2.4.
4.1.2.5.2 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the
total annual gas energy consumption of a conventional gas oven,
EAOG, expressed in Btu's (kJ) per year and defined as:
EAOG=ECO+ESC+EPO,
Where:
ECO=annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined
in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
EPO=annual pilot light energy consumption as determined in
Section 4.1.2.2.
ESC=annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.1.
If the conventional gas oven uses electrical energy, calculate the
total annual electrical energy consumption, EAOE, expressed
in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:
EAOE=ESO+ESS+ECL,
Where:
ESO=annual secondary cooking energy consumption as determined
in Section 4.1.2.1.2.
ESS=annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in Section 4.1.2.3.2.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section
4.1.2.4.
4.1.2.6. Total annual energy consumption of multiple conventional
ovens. If the cooking appliance includes more than one conventional
oven, calculate the total annual energy consumption of the conventional
ovens using the following equations:
4.1.2.6.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate
the total annual energy consumption, ETO, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per
year and defined as:
ETO = EACO + EASC + ECL,
Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.008
is the average annual primary energy consumption for cooking,
and where:
n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as
determined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.009
average annual self-cleaning energy consumption,
Where:
n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined according to Section 4.1.2.3.1.
ECL = clock energy consumption as determined according to
Section 4.1.2.4.
4.1.2.6.2 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the total
annual gas energy consumption, ETOG, in Btu's (kJ) per year
and defined as:
ETOG = EACO + EASC + ETPO,
Where:
EACO = average annual primary energy consumption for cooking
in Btu's (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.010
Where:
n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as
determined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
and,
EASC = average annual self-cleaning energy consumption in
Btu's (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[[Page 181]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.011
Where:
n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined according to Section 4.1.2.3.1.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.012
total energy consumption of any pilot lights,
Where:
EPO = annual energy consumption of any continuously burning
pilot lights determined according to Section 4.1.2.2.
n = number of pilot lights in the basic model.
If the oven also uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual
electrical energy consumption, ETOE, in kilowatt-hours (kJ)
per year and defined as:
ETOE = EASO + EAAS + ECL,
Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.013
is the average annual secondary energy consumption for cooking,
Where:
n=number of conventional ovens in the basic model.
ESO=annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.1.2.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.014
is the average annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption,
Where:
n=number of self-cleaning ovens in the basic model.
ESS=annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption of gas
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.3.2.
ECL=annual clock energy consumption as determined in Section
4.1.2.4.
4.1.3 Conventional oven cooking efficiency.
4.1.3.1 Single conventional oven. Calculate the conventional oven
cooking efficiency, EffAO, using the following equations:
For electric ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.015
and,
For gas ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.016
Where:
W1=measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).
Cp=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg/ [deg]C), specific heat of
test block.
TS=234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test block.
EO=test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or
calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor for watt-hours
to Btu's.
EIO=electrical test energy consumption according to Section
3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.
4.1.3.2 Multiple conventional ovens. If the cooking appliance
includes more than one conventional oven, calculate the cooking
efficiency for all of the conventional ovens in the appliance,
EffTO, using the following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.017
Where:
n=number of conventional ovens in the cooking appliance.
EffAO=cooking efficiency of each oven determined according to
Section 4.1.3.1.
4.1.4 Conventional oven energy factor. Calculate the energy factor,
or the ratio of useful cooking energy output to the total energy input,
RO, using the following equations:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.018
For electric ovens,
Where:
OO=29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
EAO=total annual energy consumption for electric ovens as
determined in Section 4.1.2.5.1.
For gas ovens:
[[Page 182]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.019
Where:
OO=88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
EAOG=total annual gas energy consumption for conventional gas
ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.5.2.
EAOE=total annual electrical energy consumption for
conventional gas ovens as determined in Section 4.1.2.5.2.
Ke=3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh), conversion factor for
kilowatt-hours to Btu's.
4.2 Conventional cooking top
4.2.1 Conventional cooking top cooking efficiency
4.2.1.1 Electric surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the
cooking efficiency, EffSU, of the electric surface unit under
test, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.020
Where:
W=measured weight of test block, W2 or W3,
expressed in pounds (kg).
Cp=0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg/ [deg]C), specific heat of
test block.
TSU=temperature rise of the test block: final test block
temperature, TCT, as determined in Section 3.2.2, minus the
initial test block temperature, TI, expressed in [deg]F
([deg]C) as determined in Section 2.7.5.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-hours
to Btu's.
ECT=measured energy consumption, as determined according to
Section 3.2.2, expressed in watt-hours (kJ).
The energy consumed by a continuously operating clock that cannot be
disconnected during the cooktop test may be subtracted from the energy
consumption, ECT, as determined in Section 3.2.2.
4.2.1.2 Gas surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the cooking
efficiency, EffSU, of the gas surface unit under test,
defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.021
Where:
W3=measured weight of test block as measured in Section
3.3.2, expressed in pounds (kg).
Cp and TSU are the same as defined in Section
4.2.1.1.
and,
E=[VCT - VCPxH] + (EICxKe),
Where:
VCT=total gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L) for the
gas surface unit test as measured in Section 3.2.2.
EIC=electrical energy consumed in watt-hours (kJ) by an
ignition device of a gas surface unit as measured in Section 3.2.2.
Ke=3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-hours
to Btu's.
H=either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2 and Section 2.2.2.3,
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L) of gas.
VCP=QCPxtCT, pilot consumption, in
standard cubic feet (L), during unit test,
Where:
tCT=the elapsed test time as defined in Section 3.2.2.
and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.022
(pilot flow in standard cubic feet per hour)
Where:
VCP=any pilot lights gas consumption defined in Section
3.2.2.1.
tCP=elapsed time of the cooking top pilot lights test as
defined in Section 3.2.2.1.
4.2.1.3 Conventional cooking top cooking efficiency. Calculate the
conventional cooking top cooking efficiency, EffCT, using the
following equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.023
Where:
n=number of surface units in the cooking top.
EffSU=the efficiency of each of the surface units, as
determined according to Section 4.2.1.1 or Section 4.2.1.2.
4.2.2 Conventional cooking top annual energy consumption.
4.2.2.1 Conventional electric cooking top energy consumption.
Calculate the annual energy consumption of an electric cooking top,
ECA, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.024
Where:
OCT=173.1 kWh (623,160 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
EffCT=conventional cooking top cooking efficiency as defined
in Section 4.2.1.3.
4.2.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top
[[Page 183]]
4.2.2.2.1 Annual cooking energy consumption. Calculate the annual
energy consumption for cooking, ECC, in Btu's (kJ) per year
for a gas cooking top, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.025
Where:
OCT=527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
EffCT=the gas cooking top efficiency as defined in Section
4.2.1.3.
4.2.2.2.2 Annual energy consumption of any continuously burning gas
pilots. Calculate the annual energy consumption of any continuously
burning gas pilot lights of the cooking top, EPC, in Btu's
(kJ) per year, defined as:
EPC=QCPxAxH,
Where:
QCP=pilot light gas flow rate as measured in Section 3.2.2.1.
A=8,760 hours, the total number of hours in a year.
H=either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas
used in the test as specified in Section 2.2.2.2. and Section 2.2.2.3,
expressed in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L) of gas.
4.2.2.2.3 Total annual energy consumption of a conventional gas
cooking top. Calculate the total annual energy consumption of a
conventional gas cooking top, ECA, in Btu's (kJ) per year,
defined as:
ECA=ECC + EPC,
Where:
ECC=energy consumption for cooking as determined in Section
4.2.2.2.1.
EPC=annual energy consumption of the pilot lights as
determined in Section 4.2.2.2.2.
4.2.3 Conventional cooking top energy factor. Calculate the energy
factor or ratio of useful cooking energy output for cooking to the total
energy input, RCT, as follows:
For an electric cooking top, the energy factor is the same as the
cooking efficiency as determined according to Section 4.2.1.3.
For gas cooking tops,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.026
Where:
OCT=527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of cooking top.
ECA=total annual energy consumption of cooking top determined
according to Section 4.2.2.2.3.
4.3 Combined components. The annual energy consumption of a kitchen
range, e.g. a cooktop and oven combined, shall be the sum of the annual
energy consumption of each of its components. The annual energy
consumption for other combinations of ovens, cooktops and microwaves
will also be treated as the sum of the annual energy consumption of each
of its components. The energy factor of a combined component is the sum
of the annual useful cooking energy output of each component divided by
the sum of the total annual energy consumption of each component.
4.4 Microwave oven.
4.4.1 Microwave oven test energy output. Calculate the microwave
oven test energy output, ET, in watt-hour's (kJ). The
calculation is repeated two or three times as required in section 3.2.3.
The average of the ET's is used for a calculation in section
4.4.3. For calculations specified in units of energy [watt-hours (kJ)],
use the equation below:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.027
Where:
MW=the measured mass of the test water load, in pounds (g).
MC=the measured mass of the test container before filling
with test water load, in pounds (g).
T1=the initial test water load temperature, in [deg]F
([deg]C).
T2=the final test water load temperature, in [deg]F ([deg]C).
T0=the measured ambient room temperature, in [deg]F ([deg]C).
CC=0.210 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.88 kJ/kg [middot] [deg]C), specific
heat of test container.
Cp=1.0 Btu/lb-[deg]F (4.187 kJ/kg [middot] [deg]C), specific
heat of water.
Ke=3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh) conversion factor of
kilowatt-hours to Btu's.
4.4.2 Microwave oven test power output. Calculate the microwave oven
test power output, PT, in watts (J/s) as specified in Section
four, paragraph 12.5 of IEC 705 Amendment 2 See Section 430.22. The
calculation is repeated for each test as required in section 3.2.3. The
average of the two or three PT's is used for calculations in
section 4.4.4. (See 10 CFR 430.22)
4.4.3 Microwave oven annual energy consumption. Calculate the
microwave oven annual energy consumption, Emo, in KWh's per
year, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.028
Where:
EM=the energy consumption as defined in Section 3.2.3.
[[Page 184]]
OM=79.8 kWh (287,280 kJ) per year, the microwave oven annual
useful cooking energy output.
ET=the test energy as calculated in Section 4.4.1.
4.4.4 Microwave oven cooking efficiency. Calculate the microwave oven
cooking efficiency, EffMO, as specified in Section four,
paragraph 14 of IEC 705.
4.4.5 Microwave oven energy factor. Calculate the energy factor or the
ratio of the useful cooking energy output to total energy input on a
yearly basis, RMO, defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.029
Where:
OM=79.8 kWh (287,280 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.
EMO=annual total energy consumption as determined in Section
4.4.3.
[62 FR 51981, Oct. 3, 1997]
Appendix J to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers
The provisions of this appendix J shall apply to products
manufactured after April 13, 2001. The procedures and calculations in
sections 3.3, 4.3, and 4.4 of this Appendix need not be performed to
determine compliance with the energy conservation standards for clothes
washers.
1. DEFINITIONS
1.1 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system,
other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of
automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on
characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container,
without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The
automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection,
modification, or control of any of the following: wash water
temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and
spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger
such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the
presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering
substitute or complementary product.
Note: Appendix J does not provide a means for determining the energy
consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system.
Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to
establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.2 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water
fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the
water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed
in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer
intervention and/or actions.
1.3 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has
been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for
10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent
or less.
1.4 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes
washer that holds the clothes during operation of the machine.
1.5 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container
capacity of less than 1.6 ft3 (45 L).
1.6 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes
container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load
is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
1.7 Front-loader clothes washer means a clothes washer which
sequentially rotates or tumbles portions of the clothes load above the
water level allowing the clothes load to fall freely back into the
water. The principal axis of the clothes container is in a horizontal
plane and the access to the clothes container is through the front of
the machine.
1.8 Lockout means that at least one wash/rinse water temperature
combination is not available in the normal cycle that is available in
another cycle on the machine.
1.9 Make-up water means the amount of fresh water needed to
supplement the amount of stored water pumped from the external laundry
tub back into the clothes washer when the suds-return feature is
activated in order to achieve the required water fill level in the
clothes washer.
1.10 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or
liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes
washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption
expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the
hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the
remaining moisture in the wash load.
1.11 Most energy intensive cycle means the non-normal cycle that
uses the most energy for a given wash/rinse temperature combination.
1.12 Non-normal cycle means a cycle other than the normal cycle, but
does not include any manually selected pre-wash, pre-soak, and extra-
rinse option.
1.13 Nonwater-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which
does not have
[[Page 185]]
an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
1.14 Normal cycle means the cycle recommended by the manufacturer
for washing cotton and/or linen clothes.
1.15 Sensor filled means a water fill control which automatically
terminates the fill when the water reaches an appropriate level in the
tub.
1.16 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed
onto the clothes load for a definite period of time without maintaining
any specific water level in the clothes container.
1.17 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container
capacity of 1.6 ft \3\ (45 L) or greater.
1.18 Suds-return means a feature or option on a clothes washer which
causes the stored wash water obtained by utilizing the suds-saver
feature to be pumped from the external laundry tub back into the clothes
washer.
1.19 Suds-saver means a feature or option on a clothes washer which
allows the user to store used wash water in an external laundry tub for
use with subsequent wash loads.
1.20 Temperature use factor means the percentage of the total number
of washes a user would wash with a particular wash/rinse temperature
setting.
1.21 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer
controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold
supply water.
1.22 Time filled means a water fill control which uses a combination
of water flow controls in conjunction with time to terminate the water
fill cycle.
1.23 Top-loader-horizontal-axis clothes washer means a clothes
washer which: rotates or tumbles portions of the clothes load above the
water level allowing the clothes load to fall freely back into the water
with the principal axis in a horizontal plane and has access to the
clothes container through the top of the clothes washer.
1.24 Top-loader-vertical-axis clothes washer means a clothes washer
that: flexes and oscillates the submerged clothes load through the water
by means of mechanical agitation or other movement; has a clothes
container with the principal axis in a vertical plane; and has access to
the clothes container through the top of the clothes washer.
1.25 Water consumption factor means the quotient of the total
weighted per-cycle water consumption divided by the capacity of the
clothes washer.
1.26 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some
or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water
heating device internal to the clothes washer.
2. TESTING CONDITIONS
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 Electrical energy supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the
clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240 or 120/
208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system
as specified by the manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual
voltage conversion capability, conduct the test at the highest voltage
specified by the manufacturer.
2.3 Supply water. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped
with thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the
hot and cold water supply shall be maintained at 100 [deg]F+-10 [deg]F
(37.8 [deg]C+-5.5 [deg]C). For nonwater-heating clothes washers equipped
with thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the
hot water supply shall be maintained at 140 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (60.0
[deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be maintained at 60
[deg]F+-5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C). For water-heating clothes
washers, the temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at
140 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply
shall not exceed 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). Water meters shall be
installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water
consumption.
2.3.1 Supply water requirements for water and energy consumption
testing. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped with
thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the hot and
cold water supply shall be maintained at 100[deg] +- 10 [deg]F (37.8
[deg]C +- 5.5 [deg]C). For nonwater-heating clothes washers equipped
with thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the
hot water supply shall be maintained at 140 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (60.0
[deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be maintained at
60 [deg]F +- 5F[deg] (15.6 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C). For water-heating
clothes washers, the temperature of the hot water supply shall be
maintained at 140 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) and the
cold water supply shall not exceed 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). Water meters
shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water
consumption.
2.3.2 Supply water requirements for remaining moisture content
testing. For nonwater-heating clothes washers not equipped with
thermostatically controlled water valves, the temperature of the hot
water supply shall be maintained at 140 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F and the cold
water supply shall be maintained at 60 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F. All other
clothes washers shall be connected to water supply temperatures as
stated in 2.3.1 of this appendix.
2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold
water inlet connections of the machine shall be maintained during the
test at 35 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)+-2.5 psig (241.3 kPa+-
17.2 kPa).
[[Page 186]]
The static water pressure for a single water inlet connection shall be
maintained during the test at 35 psig+-2.5 psig (241.3 kPa+-17.2 kPa).
Water pressure gauges shall be installed in both the hot and cold water
lines to measure water pressure.
2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the
following instruments, as appropriate:
2.5.1 Weighing scales.
2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a
resolution no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no greater
than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurements.
The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and
a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution
no larger than 1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2
percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0
kJ).
2.5.3 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error
no greater than +-1 [deg]F (+-0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
2.5.4 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger
than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2
percent for all water flow rates from 1 gal/min (3.8 L/min) to 5 gal/min
(18.9 L/min).
2.5.5 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a
resolution no larger than 1 psig (6.9 kPa) and shall have an error no
greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 32.5 psig
(224.1 kPa) to 37.5 psig (258.6 kPa).
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and
consist of the following:
2.6.1.1 Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite
weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs
5.75 oz/yd \2\ (195.0 g/m \2\) and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks
on the fill.
2.6.1.2 Cloth material that is 24 in by 36 in (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm)
and has been hemmed to 22 in by 34 in (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before
washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than
four percent on the length and width.
2.6.1.3 The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall
not exceed 60 test runs. All energy test cloth must be permanently
marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of
material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made
from energy test cloth material and shall consist of pieces of material
that are 12 inches by 12 inches (30.5 cm by 30.5 cm) and have been
hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches (25.4 cm by 25.4 cm) before washing.
The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four
percent on the length and width. The number of test runs on the same
energy suffer cloth shall not exceed 60 test runs. All energy stuffer
cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the
material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the
clothes washers.
2.7 Composition of test loads.
2.7.1 Seven pound test load. The seven pound test load shall consist
of bone-dry energy test cloths which weigh 7 lbs +-0.07 lbs (3.18 kg +-
0.03 kg). Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can
be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths.
2.7.2 Three pound test load. The three pound test load shall consist
of bone-dry energy test cloths which weigh 3 lbs +-0.03 lbs (1.36 kg +-
0.014 kg). Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can
be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths.
2.8 Use of test loads.
2.8.1 For a standard size clothes washer, a seven pound load, as
described in section 2.7.1, shall be used to test the maximum water fill
and a three pound test load, as described in section 2.7.2, shall be
used to test the minimum water fill.
2.8.2 For a compact size clothes washer, a three pound test load as
described in section 2.7.2 shall be used to test the maximum and minimum
water fill levels.
2.8.3 A vertical-axis clothes washer without adaptive water fill
control system also shall be tested without a test load for purposes of
calculating the energy factor.
2.8.4 The test load sizes to be used to measure remaining moisture
content (RMC) are specified in section 3.3.2.
2.8.5 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center,
shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them into the clothes
container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9 Preconditioning. If the clothes washer has not been filled with
water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by running it through
a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump,
and sump are filled with water.
2.10 Wash time (period of agitation or tumble) setting. If the
maximum available wash time in the normal cycle is greater than 9.75
minutes, the wash time shall be not less than 9.75 minutes. If the
maximum available wash time in the normal cycle is less than 9.75
minutes, the wash time shall be the maximum available wash time.
2.11 Agitation speed and spin speed settings. Where controls are
provided for agitation speed and spin speed selections, set them as
follows:
2.11.1 For energy and water consumption tests, set at the normal
cycle settings. If settings at the normal cycle are not offered, set the
control settings to the maximum speed permitted on the clothes washer.
[[Page 187]]
2.11.2 For remaining moisture content tests, see section 3.3.
3. TEST MEASUREMENTS
3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a
dry clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during washer
operation according to sections 3.1.1 through 3.1.5.
3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost
edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that
the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm)
plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within
the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy
test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm)
plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 [deg]F +-5
[deg]F (15.6 [deg]C +-2.8 [deg]C) or 100 [deg]F +-10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C
+-5.5 [deg]C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure and record the weight
of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:
C=W/d.
where:
C=Capacity in cubic feet (or liters).
W=Mass of water in pounds (or kilograms).
d=Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft 3 for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m
3 for 37.8 [deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft 3 for 60 [deg]F
(998 kg/m 3 for 15.6 [deg]C)).
3.2 Test cycle. Establish the test conditions set forth in section 2
of this Appendix.
3.2.1 A clothes washer that has infinite temperature selections
shall be tested at the following temperature settings: hottest setting
available on the machine, hot (a minimum of 140 [deg]F (60.0 [deg]C) and
a maximum of 145 [deg]F (62.8 [deg]C)), warm (a minimum of 100 [deg]F
(37.8 [deg]C) and a maximum of 105 [deg]F (40.6 [deg]C)), and coldest
setting available on the machine. These temperatures must be confirmed
by measurement using a temperature measuring device. If the measured
final water temperature is not within the specified range, stop testing,
adjust the temperature selector accordingly, and repeat the procedure.
3.2.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and/or
unique temperature selections.
3.2.2.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system.
When testing a clothes washer that has adaptive water fill control, the
maximum and the minimum test loads as specified in 2.8.1 and 2.8.2 shall
be used. The amount of water fill shall be determined by the control
system. If the clothes washer provides consumer selection of variable
water fill amounts for the adaptive water fill control system, two
complete sets of tests shall be conducted. The first set of tests shall
be conducted with the adaptive water fill control system set in the
setting that will use the greatest amount of energy. The second set of
tests shall be conducted with the adaptive water fill control system set
in the setting that will use the smallest amount of energy. Then, the
results from these two tests shall be averaged to determine the adaptive
water fill energy consumption value. If a clothes washer with an
adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual
controls as an alternative, both the manual and adaptive modes shall be
tested and the energy consumption values, ET, ME,
and DE (if desired), calculated in section 4 for each mode,
shall be averaged between the manual and adaptive modes.
3.2.2.2 Clothes washers with multiple warm wash temperature
combination selections.
3.2.2.2.1 If a clothes washer's temperature combination selections
are such that the temperature of each warm wash setting that is above
the mean warm wash temperature (the mean temperature of the coldest and
warmest warm settings) is matched by a warm wash setting that is an
equal distance below the mean, then the energy test shall be conducted
at the mean warm wash temperature if such a selection is provided, or if
there is no position on the control that permits selection of the mean
temperature, the energy test shall be conducted with the temperature
selection set at the next hotter temperature setting that is available
above the mean.
3.2.2.2.2 If the multiple warm wash temperature combination
selections do not meet criteria in section 3.2.2.2.1, the energy test
shall be conducted with the temperature selection set at the warm wash
temperature setting that gives the next higher water temperature than
the mean temperature of the coldest and warmest warm settings.
3.2.2.3 Clothes washers with multiple temperature settings within a
temperature combination selection. When a clothes washer is provided
with a secondary control that can modify the wash or rinse temperature
within a temperature combination selection, the secondary control shall
be set to provide the hottest wash temperature available and the hottest
rinse temperature available. For instance, when the temperature
combination selection is set for the middle warm wash temperature and a
secondary control exists which allows this temperature to be increased
or decreased, the secondary control shall be set to provide the hottest
warm wash temperature available for the middle warm wash setting.
3.2.3 Clothes washers that do not lockout any wash/rinse temperature
combinations in the
[[Page 188]]
normal cycle. Test in the normal cycle all temperature combination
selections that are required to be tested.
3.2.3.1 Hot water consumption, cold water consumption, and
electrical energy consumption at maximum fill. Set the water level
selector at maximum fill available on the clothes washer, if manually
controlled, and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable.
Activate the normal cycle of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver
switch.
3.2.3.1.1 For automatic clothes washers, set the wash/rinse
temperature selector to the hottest temperature combination setting. For
semi-automatic clothes washers, open the hot water faucet valve
completely and close the cold water faucet valve completely to achieve
the hottest temperature combination setting.
3.2.3.1.2 Measure the electrical energy consumption of the clothes
washer for the complete cycle.
3.2.3.1.3 Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of
hot and cold water used to fill the tub for the wash cycle.
3.2.3.1.4 Measure the respective number of gallons (or liters) of
hot and cold water used for all deep rinse cycles.
3.2.3.1.5 Measure the respective gallons (or liters) of hot and cold
water used for all spray rinse cycles.
3.2.3.1.6 For non-water-heating automatic clothes washers repeat
sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse
temperature selections available that uses heated water and is required
to be tested. For water-heating clothes washers, repeat sections
3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5 for each of the other wash/rinse temperature
selections available that uses heated water and is required to be
tested. (When calculating water consumption under section 4.3 for any
machine covered by the previous two sentences, also test the cold wash/
cold rinse selection.) For semi-automatic clothes washers, repeat
sections 3.2.3.1.3 through 3.2.3.1.5 for the other wash/rinse
temperature settings in section 6 with the following water faucet valve
adjustments:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Faucet position
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot valve Cold valve
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot.............................. Completely open....................... Closed.
Warm............................. Completely open....................... Completely open.
Cold............................. Closed................................ Completely open.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3.1.7 If the clothes washer is equipped with a suds-saver cycle,
repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 to 3.2.3.1.5 with suds-saver switch set to
suds return for the Warm/Cold temperature setting.
3.2.3.2 Hot water consumption, cold water consumption, and
electrical energy consumption with the water level selector at minimum
fill. Set the water level selector at minimum fill, if manually
controlled, and insert the appropriate test load, if applicable.
Activate the normal cycle of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver
switch. Repeat sections 3.2.3.1.1 through 3.2.3.1.7.
3.2.3.3 Hot and cold water consumption for clothes washers that
incorporate a partial fill during the rinse cycle. For clothes washers
that incorporate a partial fill during the rinse cycle, activate any
suds-saver switch and operate the clothes washer for the complete normal
cycle at both the maximum water fill level and the minimum water fill
level for each of the wash/rinse temperature selections available.
Measure the respective hot and cold water consumed during the complete
normal cycle.
3.2.4 Clothes washers that lockout any wash/rinse temperature
combinations in the normal cycle. In addition to the normal cycle tests
in section 3.2.3, perform the following tests on non-normal cycles for
each wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out in
the normal cycle.
3.2.4.1 Set the cycle selector to a non-normal cycle which has the
wash/rinse temperature combination selection that is locked out. Set the
water level selector at maximum fill and insert the appropriate test
load, if applicable. Activate the cycle of the clothes washer and also
any suds-saver switch. Set the wash/rinse temperature selector to the
temperature combination setting that is locked out in the normal cycle
and repeat sections 3.2.3.1.2 through 3.2.3.1.5.
3.2.4.2 Repeat section 3.2.4.1 under the same temperature
combination setting for all other untested non-normal cycles on the
machine that have the wash/rinse temperature combination selection that
is locked out.
3.2.4.3 Total the measured hot water consumption of the wash, deep
rinse, and spray rinse of each non-normal cycle tested in sections
3.2.4.1 through 3.2.4.2 and compare the total for each cycle. The cycle
that has the highest hot water consumption shall be the most energy
intensive cycle for that particular wash/rinse temperature combination
setting.
3.2.4.4 Set the water level selector at minimum fill and insert the
appropriate test load, if applicable. Activate the most energy intensive
cycle, as determined in section
[[Page 189]]
3.2.4.3, of the clothes washer and also any suds-saver switch. Repeat
tests as described in section 3.2.4.1.
3.3 Remaining Moisture Content (RMC).
3.3.1 The wash temperature shall be the same as the rinse
temperature for all testing. Cold rinse is the coldest rinse temperature
available on the machine. Warm rinse is the hottest rinse temperature
available on the machine.
3.3.2 Determine the test load as shown in the following table:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Container volume Test load
------------------------------------------------------------------------
liter = < eq>= < lb kg
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0-0.80................................ 0-22.7 3.00 1.36
0.80-0.90............................. 22.7-25.5 3.50 1.59
0.90-1.00............................. 25.5-28.3 3.90 1.77
1.00-1.10............................. 28.3-31.1 4.30 1.95
1.10-1.20............................. 31.1-34.0 4.70 2.13
1.20-1.30............................. 34.0-36.8 5.10 2.31
1.30-1.40............................. 36.8-39.6 5.50 2.49
1.40-1.50............................. 39.6-42.5 5.90 2.68
1.50-1.60............................. 42.5-45.3 6.40 2.90
1.60-1.70............................. 45.3-48.1 6.80 3.08
1.70-1.80............................. 48.1-51.0 7.20 3.27
1.80-1.90............................. 51.0-53.8 7.60 3.45
1.90-2.00............................. 53.8-56.6 8.00 3.63
2.00-2.10............................. 56.6-59.5 8.40 3.81
2.10-2.20............................. 59.5-62.3 8.80 3.99
2.20-2.30............................. 62.3-65.1 9.20 4.17
2.30-2.40............................. 65.1-68.0 9.60 4.35
2.40-2.50............................. 68.0-70.8 10.00 4.54
2.50-2.60............................. 70.8-73.6 10.50 4.76
2.60-2.70............................. 73.6-76.5 10.90 4.94
2.70-2.80............................. 76.5-79.3 11.30 5.13
2.80-2.90............................. 79.3-82.1 11.70 5.31
2.90-3.00............................. 82.1-85.0 12.10 5.49
3.00-3.10............................. 85.0-87.8 12.50 5.67
3.10-3.20............................. 87.8-90.6 12.90 5.85
3.20-3.30............................. 90.6-93.4 13.30 6.03
3.30-3.40............................. 93.4-96.3 13.70 6.21
3.40-3.50............................. 96.3-99.1 14.10 6.40
3.50-3.60............................. 99.1-101.9 14.60 6.62
3.60-3.70............................. 101.9-104.8 15.00 6.80
3.70-3.80............................. 104.8-107.6 15.40 6.99
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
(1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.
(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are +-0.10 lbs (0.05
kg).
3.3.3 For clothes washers with cold rinse only.
3.3.3.1 Record the actual bone dry weight of the test load (WI),
then place the test load in the clothes washer.
3.3.3.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.3.3.3 Run the normal cycle.
3.3.3.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after
completion of the normal cycle (WC).
3.3.3.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load,
RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMC=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%
3.3.4 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options.
3.3.4.1 Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the cold rinse.
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for cold
rinse, RMCCOLD, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMCCOLD=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%
3.3.4.2 Complete steps 3.3.3.1 through 3.3.3.4 for the warm rinse.
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load for warm
rinse, RMCWARM, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMCWARM=[(WC-WI)/WI]x100%
3.3.4.3 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load,
RMC, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMC=0.73xRMCCOLD+0.27xRMCWARM
3.3.5 Clothes washers which have options that result in different
RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times that
are available in the normal cycle, shall be tested at the maximum and
minimum settings of the available options, excluding any ``no spin''
(zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements in 3.3.3 or
3.3.4. The calculated RMCmax extraction and
RMCmin extraction at the maximum and minimum settings,
respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final RMC to be used
in section 4.2 shall be:
RMC=0.75xRMCmax extraction+0.25x
RMCmin extraction
3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle in sections 3.2.1
through 3.3.5.
3.4.1 For non-water-heating clothes washers, record the kilowatt-
hours of electrical energy, ME, consumed during the test to
operate the clothes washer in section 3.2.3.1.2. For water-heating
clothes washers record the kilowatt-hours of electrical energy,
Ehi consumed at maximum fill in sections 3.2.3.1.2 and
3.2.3.1.6, and Ehj consumed at minimum fill in section
3.2.3.2.
3.4.2 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold
water consumption, Vhi and Vci, measured at
maximum fill level for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting
tested in section 3.2.3, or in both 3.2.3 and 3.2.4, excluding any fresh
make-up water required to complete the fill during a suds-return cycle.
3.4.3 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold
water consumption, Vhj and Vcj, measured at
minimum fill level for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting
tested in section 3.2.3, or in both 3.2.3 and 3.2.4, excluding any fresh
make-up water required to complete the fill during a suds-return cycle.
3.4.4 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold
water, ShH and ScH, measured at maximum fill for
the suds-return cycle.
[[Page 190]]
3.4.5 Record the individual gallons (or liters) of hot and cold
water, ShL and ScL, measured at minimum fill for
the suds-return cycle.
3.4.6 Data recording requirements for RMC tests are listed in
sections 3.3.3 through 3.3.5.
4. CALCULATION OF DERIVED RESULTS FROM TEST MEASUREMENTS
4.1 Energy consumption.
4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for
maximum and minimum water fill levels. Calculate for the cycle under
test the per-cycle temperature weighted hot water consumption for the
maximum water fill level, Vhmax, and for the minimum water
fill level, Vhmin, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters
per cycle) and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.000
where:
Vhi=reported hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or
liters per cycle) at maximum fill for each wash/rinse temperature
combination setting, as provided in section 3.4.2. If a clothes washer
is equipped with two or more different wash/rinse temperature selections
that have the same basic temperature combination selection label (for
example, one of them has its water temperature controlled by
thermostatically controlled valves and the other one does not), then the
largest Vhi shall be used for this calculation. If a clothes
washer has lockout(s), there will be ``Vhi's'' for wash/rinse
temperature combination settings available in the normal cycle and
``Vhi's'' for wash/rinse temperature combination settings in
the most energy intensive cycle.
Vhj=reported hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or
liters per cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature
combination setting, as provided in section 3.4.3. If a clothes washer
is equipped with two or more different wash/rinse temperature selections
that have the same basic temperature combination selection label (for
example, one of them has its water temperature controlled by
thermostatically controlled valves and the other one does not), then the
largest Vhj shall be used for the calculation. If a clothes
washer has lockouts, there will be ``Vhj's'' for wash/rinse
temperature combination settings available in the normal cycle and
``Vhj's'' for wash/rinse temperature combination settings in
the most energy intensive cycle.
L=lockout factor to be applied to the reported hot water consumption.
For wash/rinse temperature combination settings that are not locked out
in the normal cycle, L=1. For each wash/rinse temperature combination
setting that is locked out in the normal cycle, L=0.32 in the normal
cycle and L=0.68, in the most energy intensive cycle.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the
user for the clothes washer under test. For clothes washers that lockout
temperature selections in the normal cycle, n=the number of wash/rinse
temperature combination settings on the washers plus the number of wash/
rinse temperature combination settings that lockout the temperature
selections in the normal cycle.
TUFw=temperature use factor for warm wash setting.
For clothes washers equipped with the suds-saver feature:
X1=frequency of use without the suds-saver feature=0.86.
X2=frequency of use with the suds-saver feature=0.14.
ShH=fresh make-up water measured during suds-return cycle at
maximum water fill level.
ShL=fresh hot make-up water measured during suds-return cycle
at minimum water fill level.
For clothes washers not equipped with the suds-saver feature:
X1=1.0
X2=0.0
4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for maximum and
minimum water fill
[[Page 191]]
levels. Calculate the total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for
the maximum water fill level, Emax and for the minimum water
fill level, Emin, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and
defined as:
Emax=[VhmaxxTxKxMF]
Emin=[VhminxTxKxMF]
where:
T=temperature rise=90 [deg]F (50 [deg]C).
K=water specific heat=0.00240 kWh/(gal- [deg]F) [0.00114kWh/(L-
[deg]C)].
Vhmax=as defined in section 4.1.1.
Vhmin=as defined in section 4.1.1.
MF=multiplying factor to account for absence of test load=0.94 for top-
loader vertical axis clothes washers that are sensor filled, 1.0 for all
other clothes washers.
4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption
expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total weighted per cycle hot
water energy consumption, ET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per
cycle and defined as:
ET=[EmaxxFmax]+[EminxFmin
]
where:
Fmax=usage fill factor=0.72.
Fmin=usage fill factor=0.28.
Emax=as defined in section 4.1.2.
Emin=as defined in section 4.1.2.
4.1.4 Per-cycle water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-
heated water. Calculate for the normal cycle the per-cycle energy
consumption, ETG, using gas-heated or oil-heated water,
expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.001
where:
e=nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency=0.75.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption.
4.1.5.1 Non-water-heating clothes washers. The electrical energy
value recorded for the maximum fill in section 3.4.1 is the per-cycle
machine electrical energy consumption, ME, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle.
4.1.5.2 Water-heating clothes washers.
4.1.5.2.1 Calculate for the cycle under test the per-cycle
temperature weighted electrical energy consumption for the maximum water
fill level, Ehmax, and for the minimum water fill level,
Ehmin, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.002
where:
Ehi=reported electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours
per cycle at maximum fill for each wash/cycle temperature combination
setting, as provided in section 3.4.1.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the
user for the clothes washer under test.
and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.003
where:
Ehj=reported electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours
per cycle at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination
setting, as provided in section 3.4.1.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=as defined above in this section.
4.1.5.2.2 Weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption.
Calculate the weighted per cycle machine energy consumption,
ME, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
ME=[EhmaxxFmax]+[EhminxFmin
]
where:
Fmax=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Fmin=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Ehmax=as defined in section 4.1.5.2.1.
Ehmin=as defined in section 4.1.5.2.1
4.1.6 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated
water is used. Calculate for the normal cycle the total per-cycle energy
consumption, ETE, using electrically heated water, expressed
in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
ETE=ET+ME
where:
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.
[[Page 192]]
4.2 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of RMC. Calculate the
amount of energy per cycle required to remove RMC. Such amount is
DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
DE=(LAF)x(test load weight)x(RMC-4%)x(DEF)x(DUF)
where:
LAF=load adjustment factor=0.52.
Test load weight=as shown in test load table in 3.3.2 expressed in lbs/
cycle.
RMC=as defined in 3.3.3.5, 3.3.4.3, or 3.3.5.
DEF=nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from
clothes=0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).
DUF=dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes
dryer=0.84.
4.3 Water consumption.
4.3.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted water consumption for maximum
and minimum water fill levels. To determine these amounts, calculate for
the cycle under test the per-cycle temperature-weighted total water
consumption for the maximum water fill level, Qmax, and for
the minimum water fill level, Qmin, expressed in gallons per
cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.004
where:
Vhi=hot water consumption in gallons per-cycle at maximum
fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting, as provided in
section 3.4.2.
Vci=total cold water consumption in gallons per-cycle at
maximum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination setting, cold
wash/cold rinse cycle, as provided in section 3.4.2.
TUFi=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
n=number of wash/rinse temperature combination settings available to the
user for the clothes washer under test.
TUFw=temperature use factor for warm wash setting.
For clothes washers equipped with suds-saver feature:
X1=frequency of use without suds-saver feature=0.86
X2=frequency of use with suds-saver feature=0.14
ShH=fresh hot water make-up measured during suds-return cycle
at maximum water fill level.
ScH=fresh cold water make-up measured during suds-return
cycle at maximum water fill level.
For clothes washers not equipped with suds-saver feature:
X1=1.0
X2=0.0
and
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.005
where:
Vhj=hot water consumption in gallons per cycle (or liters per
cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination
setting, as provided in section 3.4.3.
Vcj=cold water consumption in gallons per cycle (or liters
per cycle) at minimum fill for each wash/rinse temperature combination
setting, cold wash/cold rinse cycle, as provided in section 3.4.3.
TUFj=applicable temperature use factor in section 5 or 6.
ShL=fresh hot make-up water measured during suds-return cycle
at minimum water fill level.
ScL=fresh cold make-up water measured during suds-return
cycle at minimum water fill level.
n=as defined above in this section.
TUFw=as defined above in this section.
X1=as defined above in this section.
X2=as defined above in this section.
4.3.2 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. To determine this
amount, calculate the total weighted per cycle water
[[Page 193]]
consumption, QT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters
per cycle) and defined as:
QT=[QmaxxFmax]+[QminxFmin
]
where:
Fmax=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Fmin=as defined in section 4.1.3.
Qmax=as defined in section 4.3.1.
Qmin=as defined in section 4.3.1.
4.3.3 Water consumption factor. The following calculates the water
consumption factor, WCF, expressed in gallon per cycle per cubic foot
(or liter per cycle per liter):
WCF=QT/C
where:
C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
QT=as defined in section 4.3.2.
4.4 Modified energy factor. The following calculates the modified
energy factor, MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hours per cycle
(or liters per kilowatt-hours per cycle):
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.006
where:
C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
DE=as defined in section 4.2.
4.5 Energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in
cubic feet per kilowatt-hours per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hours
per cycle), as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27AU97.007
where:
C=as defined in section 3.1.5.
ME=as defined in section 4.1.5.1 or 4.1.5.2.2.
ET=as defined in section 4.1.3.
5. APPLICABLE TEMPERATURE USE FACTORS FOR DETERMINING HOT WATER USAGE
FOR VARIOUS WASH/RINSE TEMPERATURE SELECTIONS FOR ALL AUTOMATIC CLOTHES
WASHERS
5.1 Clothes washers with discrete temperature selections.
5.1.1 Five-temperature selection (n=5).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot/Warm................................................ 0.18
Hot/Cold................................................ .12
Warm/Warm............................................... .30
Warm/Cold............................................... .25
Cold/Cold............................................... .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.2 Four-temperature selection (n=4).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alternate I:
Hot/Warm.............................................. 0.18
Hot/Cold.............................................. .12
Warm/Cold............................................. .55
Cold/Cold............................................. .15
Alternate II:
Hot/Warm.............................................. 0.18
Hot/Cold.............................................. .12
Warm/Warm............................................. .30
Warm/Cold............................................. .40
Alternate III:
Hot/Cold.............................................. 0.12
Warm/Warm............................................. .18
Warm/Cold............................................. .55
Cold/Cold............................................. .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.3 Three-temperature selection (n=3).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alternate I:
Hot/Warm.............................................. 0.30
Warm/Cold............................................. .55
Cold/Cold............................................. .15
Alternate II:
Hot/Cold.............................................. 0.30
Warm/Cold............................................. .55
Cold/Cold............................................. .15
Alternate III:
Hot/Cold.............................................. 0.30
Warm/Warm............................................. .55
Cold/Cold............................................. .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.4 Two-temperature selection (n=2).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Any heated water/Cold................................... 0.85
Cold/Cold............................................... .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1.5 One-temperature selection (n=1).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Any..................................................... 1.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2 Clothes washers with infinite temperature selections.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature Use Factor
(TUF)
-----------------------
<= 140
Wash/rinse tempera- ture setting [deg]F
(60 140 [deg]F
[deg]C) (60 [deg]C)
(n=3) (n=4)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Extra-hot....................................... ......... 0.05
Hot............................................. 0.30 0.25
Warm............................................ 0.55 0.55
Cold............................................ 0.15 0.15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 194]]
6. APPLICABLE TEMPERATURE USE FACTORS FOR DETERMINING HOT WATER USAGE
FOR VARIOUS WASH/RINSE TEMPERATURE SETTINGS FOR ALL SEMI-AUTOMATIC, NON-
WATER-HEATING, CLOTHES WASHERS
6.1 Six-temperature settings (n=6).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature
Wash/rinse temperature setting Use Factor
(TUF)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot/Hot................................................. 0.15
Hot/Warm................................................ .09
Hot/Cold................................................ .06
Warm/Warm............................................... .42
Warm/Cold............................................... .13
Cold/Cold............................................... .15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. WAIVERS AND FIELD TESTING
7.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Non-conventional Clothes Washers.
Manufacturers of non-conventional clothes washers, such as clothes
washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver
pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for
that clothes washer. For these and other clothes washers that have
controls or systems such that the DOE test procedures yield results that
are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption
characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data,
field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable test
procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may be
used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These
guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they
do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's
approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required.
Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to
the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition
for waiver. Section 7.3 provides an example of field testing for a
clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other
features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the
subject of field tests.
7.2 Non-conventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field
test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes
washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being
distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should
include a minimum of 50 normal test cycles per clothes washer. The test
clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in
construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal
numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer
should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize
seasonal and/or consumer laundering conditions and/or variations. The
clothes washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately
record the total energy consumption per cycle. At a minimum, the
following should be measured and recorded throughout the test period for
each clothes washer: Hot water usage in gallons (or liters), electrical
energy usage in kilowatt-hours, and the cycles of usage. The field test
results would be used to determine the best method to correlate the
rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the base clothes
washer. If the base clothes washer is rated at A kWh per year, but field
tests at B kWh per year, and the test clothes washer field tests at D
kWh per year, the test unit would be rated as follows:
Ax(D/B)=G kWh per year
7.3 Adaptive water fill control system field test. Section 3.2.2.1
defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes
washers which incorporate control systems having both adaptive and
alternate manual selections. Energy consumption calculated by the method
defined in section 3.2.2.1 assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50
percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data
in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the
adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field
test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The
test clothes washers should be totally representative of the design,
construction, and control system that will be placed in commerce. The
duration of field testing in the user's house should be a minimum of 50
normal test cycles, for each unit. No special instructions as to cycle
selection or product usage should be given to the field test
participants, other than inclusion of the product literature pack which
should be shipped with all units, and instructions regarding filling out
data collection forms, use of data collection equipment, or basic
procedural methods. Prior to the test clothes washers being installed in
the field test locations, baseline data should be developed for all
field test units by conducting laboratory tests as defined by section 1
through section 6 of these test procedures to determine the energy
consumption values. The following data should be measured and recorded
for each wash load during the test period: wash cycle selected, the mode
of the clothes washer (adaptive or manual), clothes load dry weight
(measured after the clothes washer and clothes dryer cycles are
completed) in pounds, and type of articles in the clothes load (i.e.,
cottons, linens, permanent press, etc.). The wash loads used in
calculating the in-home percentage split between adaptive and manual
cycle usage should be only those wash loads which conform to the
definition of the normal test cycle.
Calculate:
[[Page 195]]
T=The total number of normal test cycles run during the field test
Ta=The total number of adaptive control normal test cycles
Tm=The total number of manual control normal test cycles
The percentage weighting factors:
Pa=(Ta/T) x 100 (the percentage weighting for
adaptive control selection)
Pm=(Tm/T) x 100 (the percentage weighting for
manual control selection)
Energy consumption values, ET, ME, and
DE (if desired) calculated in section 4 for the manual and
adaptive modes, should be combined using Pa and Pm
as the weighting factors.
8. SUNSET
The provisions of this appendix J expire on December 31, 2003.
[62 FR 45501, Aug. 27, 1997, as amended at 66 FR 3330, Jan. 12, 2001; 66
FR 8745, Feb. 2, 2001]
Appendix J1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes Washers
The provisions of this appendix J1 shall apply to products
manufactured beginning January 1, 2004.
1. DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS
1.1 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system,
other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of
automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on
characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container,
without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The
automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection,
modification, or control of any of the following: wash water
temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and
spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger
such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the
presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering
substitute or complementary product.
Note: Appendix J1 does not provide a means for determining the
energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system.
Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to
establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.2 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water
fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the
water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed
in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer
intervention or actions.
1.3 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has
been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10
minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for
10 minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent
or less.
1.4 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes
washer that holds the clothes during the operation of the machine.
1.5 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container
capacity of less than 1.6 ft3 (45 L).
1.6 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes
container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load
is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
1.7 Energy test cycle for a basic model means (A) the cycle
recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes, and
includes all wash/rinse temperature selections and water levels offered
in that cycle, and (B) for each other wash/rinse temperature selection
or water level available on that basic model, the portion(s) of other
cycle(s) with that temperature selection or water level that, when
tested pursuant to these test procedures, will contribute to an accurate
representation of the energy consumption of the basic model as used by
consumers. Any cycle under (A) or (B) shall include the agitation/tumble
operation, spin speed(s), wash times, and rinse times applicable to that
cycle, including water heating time for water heating clothes washers.
1.8 Load use factor means the percentage of the total number of wash
loads that a user would wash a particular size (weight) load.
1.9 Manual control system means a clothes washer control system
which requires that the consumer make the choices that determine washer
operation or washing conditions, such as, for example, wash/rinse
temperature selections, and wash time before starting the cycle.
1.10 Manual water fill control system means a clothes washer water
fill control system which requires the consumer to determine or select
the water fill level.
1.11 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or
liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes
washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption
expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the
hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the
remaining moisture in the wash load.
1.12 Non-water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which
does not have
[[Page 196]]
an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
1.13 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed
onto the clothes for a period of time without maintaining any specific
water level in the clothes container.
1.14 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container
capacity of 1.6 ft3 (45 L) or greater.
1.15 Temperature use factor means, for a particular wash/rinse
temperature setting, the percentage of the total number of wash loads
that an average user would wash with that setting.
1.16 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer
controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold
supply water.
1.17 Uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selection(s) means
(A) multiple warm wash selections for which the warm wash water
temperatures have a linear relationship with all discrete warm wash
selections when the water temperatures are plotted against equally
spaced consecutive warm wash selections between the hottest warm wash
and the coldest warm wash. If the warm wash has infinite selections, the
warm wash water temperature has a linear relationship with the distance
on the selection device (e.g. dial angle or slide movement) between the
hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. The criteria for a linear
relationship as specified above is that the difference between the
actual water temperature at any warm wash selection and the point where
that temperature is depicted on the temperature/selection line formed by
connecting the warmest and the coldest warm selections is less than +-5
percent. In all cases, the mean water temperature of the warmest and the
coldest warm selections must coincide with the mean of the ``hot wash''
(maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash''
(minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within +-3.8 [deg]F (+-2.1
[deg]C); or (B) on a clothes washer with only one warm wash temperature
selection, a warm wash temperature selection with a water temperature
that coincides with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum wash
temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum wash
temperature) water temperatures within +-3.8 [deg]F (+-2.1 [deg]C).
1.18 Warm wash means all wash temperature selections that are below
the hottest hot, less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C), and above the
coldest cold temperature selection.
1.19 Water consumption factor means the quotient of the total
weighted per-cycle water consumption divided by the cubic foot (or
liter) capacity of the clothes washer.
1.20 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some
or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water
heating device internal to the clothes washer.
1.21 Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided
to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure.
E--Electrical Energy Consumption
H--Hot Water Consumption
C--Cold Water Consumption
R--Hot Water Consumed by Warm Rinse
ER--Electrical Energy Consumed by Warm Rinse
TUF--Temperature Use Factor
HE--Hot Water Energy Consumption
F--Load Usage Factor
Q--Total Water Consumption
ME--Machine Electrical Energy Consumption
RMC--Remaining Moisture Content
WI--Initial Weight of Dry Test Load
WC--Weight of Test Load After Extraction
m--Extra Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. 135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C.))
h--Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C.))
w--Warm Wash
c--Cold Wash (minimum wash temp.)
r--Warm Rinse (hottest rinse temp.)
x or max--Maximum Test Load
a or avg--Average Test Load
n or min--Minimum Test Load
The following examples are provided to show how the above symbols
can be used to define variables:
Emx=``Electrical Energy Consumption'' for an ``Extra Hot
Wash'' and ``Maximum Test Load''
Ra=``Hot Water Consumed by Warm Rinse'' for the ``Average
Test Load''
TUFm=``Temperature Use Factor'' for an ``Extra Hot Wash''
HEmin=``Hot Water Energy Consumption'' for the ``Minimum Test
Load''
1.22 Cold rinse means the coldest rinse temperature available on the
machine (and should be the same rinse temperature selection tested in
3.7 of this appendix).
1.23 Warm rinse means the hottest rinse temperature available on the
machine (and should be the same rinse temperature selection tested in
3.7 of this appendix).
2. TESTING CONDITIONS
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 Electrical energy supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the
clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240, or 120/
208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system
and within 2 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the
manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual voltage conversion
capability, conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the
manufacturer.
2.3 Supply Water.
2.3.1 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption or
water energy consumption
[[Page 197]]
are affected by the inlet water temperature. (For example, water heating
clothes washers or clothes washers with thermostatically controlled
water valves.). The temperature of the hot water supply at the water
inlets shall not exceed 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) and the cold water
supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). A
water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to
measure water consumption.
2.3.2 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption and
water energy consumption are not affected by the inlet water
temperature. The temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained
at 135 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water
supply shall be maintained at 60 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C+-2.8
[deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water
lines to measure water consumption.
2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold
water inlet connection of the clothes washer shall be maintained at 35
pounds per square inch gauge (psig) +-2.5 psig (241.3 kPa+-17.2 kPa)
during the test. The static water pressure for a single water inlet
connection shall be maintained at 35 psig+-2.5 psig (241.3 kPa+-17.2
kPa) during the test. A water pressure gauge shall be installed in both
the hot and cold water lines to measure water pressure.
2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the
following instruments, as appropriate:
2.5.1 Weighing scales.
2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a
resolution of no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no
greater than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurements.
The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and
a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution
no larger than 1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2
percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0
kJ).
2.5.3 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error
no greater than +-1 [deg]F (+-0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
2.5.4 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger
than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2
percent for the water flow rates being measured.
2.5.5 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a
resolution of 1 pound per square inch gauge (psig) (6.9 kPa) and shall
have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value.
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy Test Cloth. The energy test cloth shall be made from
energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, that is 24 inches by
36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34
inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before washing. The energy test cloth shall
be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after
preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy test
cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the
material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the
clothes washers.
2.6.1.1 The energy test cloth shall not be used for more than 25
test runs and shall be clean and consist of the following:
(A) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite
weave, which is 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs
5.75 ounces per square yard (195.0 g/m2) and has 65 ends on
the warp and 57 picks on the fill; and
(B) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4
cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm)
before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be
more than four percent on the length and width.
2.6.1.2 The new test cloths, including energy test cloths and energy
stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer in the
following manner:
2.6.1.2.1 Wash the test cloth using a commercially available clothes
washing detergent that is suitable for 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) wash
water as recommended by the manufacturer, with the washer set on maximum
water level. Place detergent in washer and then place the new load to be
conditioned in the washer. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water
(17ppm or less). Wash water is to be hot, and controlled at 135 [deg]F+-
5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +-2.8 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be
cold, and controlled at 60 [deg]F +-5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C +-2.8 [deg]C).
Rinse the load through a second rinse using the same water temperature
(if an optional second rinse is available on the clothes washer, use
it).
2.6.1.2.2 Dry the load.
2.6.1.2.3 A final cycle is to be hot water wash with no detergent
followed by two cold water rinses.
2.6.1.2.4 Dry the load.
2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloth shall be made
from energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, and shall
consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches (30.5 cm
by 30.5 cm) and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches (25.4 cm by
25.4 cm) before washing. The energy stuffer cloth shall be clean and
shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as
specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy stuffer cloth must be
permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed
lots of material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
2.6.3 Preconditioning of Test Cloths. The new test cloths, including
energy test cloths
[[Page 198]]
and energy stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer
in the following manner:
2.6.3.1 Perform 5 complete normal wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first
two with AHAM Standard detergent 2A and the last three without
detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum
water level. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17 ppm
hardness or less) using 6.0 grams per gallon of water of AHAM Standard
detergent 2A. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 [deg]F +-
5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C) and the rinse temperature is to be
controlled to 60 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C +- 2.8 [deg]C). Repeat
the cycle with detergent and then repeat the cycle three additional
times without detergent, bone drying the load between cycles (total of
five wash and rinse cycles).
2.6.4 Energy test cloth material. The energy test cloths and energy
stuffer cloths shall be made from fabric meeting the following
specifications. The material should come from a roll of material with a
width of approximately 63 inches and approximately 500 yards per roll,
however, other sizes maybe used if they fall within the specifications.
2.6.4.1 Nominal fabric type. Pure finished bleached cloth, made with
a momie or granite weave, which is nominally 50 percent cotton and 50
percent polyester.
2.6.4.2 The fabric weight shall be 5.60 ounces per square yard
(190.0 g/m\2\), +-5 percent.
2.6.4.3 The thread count shall be 61 x 54 per inch (warp x fill), +-
2 percent.
2.6.4.4 The warp yarn and filling yarn shall each have fiber content
of 50 percent +-4 percent cotton, with the balance being polyester, and
be open end spun, 15/1 +-5 percent cotton count blended yarn.
2.6.4.5 Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain
resistant finishes shall not be applied to the test cloth. The absence
of such finishes shall be verified by:
2.6.4.5.1 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
(AATCC) Test Method 118--1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance
Test (reaffirmed 1997), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased
from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water
repellent finish (required scores of ``D'' across the board).
2.6.4.5.2 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
(AATCC) Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed
2000), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to
confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water repellent finish
(time to absorb one drop should be on the order of 1 second).
2.6.4.5.3 The standards listed in 2.6.4.5.1 and 2.6.4.5.2 of this
appendix which are not otherwise set forth in this part 430 are
incorporated by reference. The material listed in this paragraph has
been approved for incorporation by reference by the Director of the
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51.
Any subsequent amendment to a standard by the standard-setting
organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until
amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the
approval and notice of any change in the material will be published in
the Federal Register. The standards incorporated by reference are the
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists Test Method 118-
1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance Test (reaffirmed 1997) and
Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed 2000).
(a) The above standards incorporated by reference are available for
inspection at:
(i) Office of the Federal Register, Information Center, 800 North
Capitol Street, NW, Suite 700, Washington, DC;
(ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and
Renewable Energy, Hearings and Dockets, ``Energy Conservation Program
for Consumer Products: Clothes Washer Energy Conservation Standards,''
Docket No. EE--RM-94-403, Forrestal Building, 1000 Independence Avenue,
SW, Washington, DC.
(b) Copies of the above standards incorporated by reference can be
obtained from the American Association of Textile Chemists and
Colorists, P.O. Box 1215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, telephone
(919) 549-8141, telefax (919) 549-8933, or electronic mail:
orders@aatcc.org.
2.6.4.6 The moisture absorption and retention shall be evaluated for
each new lot of test cloth by the Standard Extractor Remaining Moisture
Content (RMC) Test specified in 2.6.5 of this appendix.
2.6.4.6.1 Repeat the Standard Extractor RMC Test in 2.6.5 of this
appendix three times.
2.6.4.6.2 An RMC correction curve shall be calculated as specified
in 2.6.6 of this appendix.
2.6.5 Standard Extractor RMC Test Procedure. The following procedure
is used to evaluate the moisture absorption and retention
characteristics of a lot of test cloth by measuring the RMC in a
standard extractor at a specified set of conditions. Table 2.6.5 of this
appendix is the matrix of test conditions. The 500g requirement will
only be used if a clothes washer design can achieve spin speeds in the
500g range. When this matrix is repeated 3 times, a total of 48
extractor RMC test runs are required. For the purpose of the extractor
RMC test, the test cloths may be used for up to 60 test runs (after
preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix).
[[Page 199]]
Table 2.6.5.--Matrix of Extractor RMC Test Conditions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Warm soak Cold soak
-------------------------------
``g Force'' 15 15
min. 4 min. min. 4 min.
spin spin spin spin
------------------------------------------------------------------------
100..................................... ...... ...... ...... ......
200..................................... ...... ...... ...... ......
350..................................... ...... ...... ...... ......
500..................................... ...... ...... ...... ......
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.6.5.1 The standard extractor RMC tests shall be run in a Bock
Model 215 extractor (having a basket diameter of 19.5 inches, length of
12 inches, and volume of 2.1 ft3), with a variable speed
drive (Bock Engineered Products, P.O. Box 5127, Toledo, OH 43611) or an
equivalent extractor with same basket design (i.e. diameter, length,
volume, and hole configuration) and variable speed drive.
2.6.5.2 Test Load. Test cloths shall be preconditioned in accordance
with 2.6.3 of this appendix. The load size shall be 8.4 lbs., consistent
with 3.8.1 of this appendix.
2.6.5.3 Procedure.
2.6.5.3.1 Record the ``bone-dry'' weight of the test load (WI).
2.6.5.3.2 Soak the test load for 20 minutes in 10 gallons of soft
(<17 ppm) water. The entire test load shall be submerged. The water
temperature shall be 100 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F.
2.6.5.3.3 Remove the test load and allow water to gravity drain off
of the test cloths. Then manually place the test cloths in the basket of
the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. Spin the load at a fixed
speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level
(measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) +-1 g for the
intended time period +-5 seconds.
2.6.5.3.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after the
completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC).
2.6.5.3.5 Calculate the RMC as (WC-WI)/WI.
2.6.5.3.6 The RMC of the test load shall be measured at three (3) g
levels: 100g; 200g; and 350g, using two different spin times at each g
level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes. If a clothes washer design can achieve
spin speeds in the 500g range then the RMC of the test load shall be
measured at four (4) g levels: 100g; 200g; 350g; and 500g, using two
different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes.
2.6.5.4 Repeat 2.6.5.3 of this appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water
at 60 [deg]F +- 5 [deg]F.
2.6.6 Calculation of RMC correction curve.
2.6.6.1 Average the values of 3 test runs and fill in table 2.6.5 of
this appendix. Perform a linear least-squares fit to relate the standard
RMC (RMCstandard) values (shown in table 2.6.6.1 of this
appendix) to the values measured in 2.6.5 of this appendix:
(RMCcloth): RMCstandard [sim] A *
RMCcloth + B
Where A and B are coefficients of the linear least-squares fit.
Table 2.6.6.1.--Standard RMC Values (RMC Standard)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RMC %
---------------------------------------------------
Warm soak Cold soak
``g Force'' ---------------------------------------------------
15 min. 15 min.
spin 4 min. spin spin 4 min. spin
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100......................................................... 45.9 49.9 49.7 52.8
200......................................................... 35.7 40.4 37.9 43.1
350......................................................... 29.6 33.1 30.7 35.8
500......................................................... 24.2 28.7 25.5 30.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.6.6.2. Perform an analysis of variance test using two factors,
spin speed and lot, to check the interaction of speed and lot. Use the
values from Table 2.6.5 and Table 2.6.6.1 in the calculation. The ``P''
value in the variance analysis shall be greater than or equal to 0.1. If
the ``P'' value is less than 0.1 the test cloth is unacceptable. ``P''
is a theoretically based probability of interaction based on an analysis
of variance.
2.6.7 Application of RMC correction curve.
2.6.7.1 Using the coefficients A and B calculated in 2.6.6.1 of this
appendix:
RMCcorr = A * RMC + B
2.6.7.2 Substitute RMCcorr values in calculations in 3.8
of this appendix.
2.7 Test Load Sizes. Maximum, minimum, and, when required, average
test load sizes shall be determined using Table 5.1 and the clothes
container capacity as measured in 3.1.1 through 3.1.5. Test loads shall
consist of energy test cloths, except that adjustments to the test loads
to achieve proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths
with no more than 5 stuffer clothes per load.
2.8 Use of Test Loads. Table 2.8 defines the test load sizes and
corresponding water fill settings which are to be used when measuring
water and energy consumptions. Adaptive water fill control system and
manual water fill control system are defined in section 1 of this
appendix:
[[Page 200]]
Table 2.8--Test Load Sizes and Water Fill Settings Required
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Manual water fill control system Adaptive water fill control system
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water fill Water fill
Test load size setting Test load size setting
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max Max Max As determined by
Min Min Avg the Clothes
Min Washer.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.8.1 The test load sizes to be used to measure RMC are specified in
section 3.8.1.
2.8.2 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements shall
be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum
of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing.
2.8.3 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center,
shaking them to hang loosely and then put them into the clothes
container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9 Pre-conditioning.
2.9.1 Nonwater-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not
been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by
running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure
that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.9.2 Water-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not
been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, or if it has not been
in the test room at the specified ambient conditions for 8 hours, pre-
condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining
it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.10 Wash time setting. If one wash time is prescribed in the energy
test cycle, that shall be the wash time setting; otherwise, the wash
time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum, or 70 percent of
the maximum wash time available in the energy test cycle.
2.11 Test room temperature for water-heating clothes washers.
Maintain the test room ambient air temperature at 75 [deg]F+-5 [deg]F
(23.9 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C).
3. TEST MEASUREMENTS
3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a
dry clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during washer
operation according to the following procedures:
3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost
edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that
the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm)
plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within
the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy
test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm)
plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 [deg]F+-5
[deg]F (15.6 [deg]C+-2.8 [deg]C) or 100 [deg]F+-10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C+-
5.5 [deg]C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure and record the weight
of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows:
C=W/d.
where:
C=Capacity in cubic feet (liters).
W=Mass of water in pounds (kilograms).
d=Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft\3\ for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m\3\ for 37.8
[deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft\3\ for 60 [deg]F (998 kg/m\3\ for 15.6 [deg]C)).
3.2 Procedure for measuring water and energy consumption values on
all automatic and semi-automatic washers. All energy consumption tests
shall be performed under the energy test cycle(s), unless otherwise
specified. Table 3.2 defines the sections below which govern tests of
particular clothes washers, based on the number of wash/rinse
temperature selections available on the model, and also, in some
instances, method of water heating. The procedures prescribed are
applicable regardless of a clothes washer's washing capacity, loading
port location, primary axis of rotation of the clothes container, and
type of control system.
3.2.1 Inlet water temperature and the wash/rinse temperature
settings.
3.2.1.1 For automatic clothes washers set the wash/rinse temperature
selection control to obtain the wash water temperature desired (extra
hot, hot, warm, or cold) and cold rinse, and open both the hot and cold
water faucets.
3.2.1.2 For semi-automatic washers: (1) For hot water temperature,
open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet;
(2) for warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water
faucets completely; (3) for cold water temperature, close the hot water
faucet and open the cold water faucet completely.
3.2.1.3 Determination of warm wash water temperature(s) to decide
whether a clothes washer has uniformly distributed warm wash
[[Page 201]]
temperature selections. The wash water temperature, Tw, of each warm
water wash selection shall be calculated or measured.
For non-water-heating clothes washers, calculate Tw as follows:
Tw( [deg]F)=((Hwx135 [deg]F)+(Cwx60 [deg]F))/(Hw+Cw)
or
Tw( [deg]C)=((Hwx57.2 [deg]C)+(Cwx15.6 [deg]C))/(Hw+Cw)
where:
Hw=Hot water consumption of a warm wash
Cw=Cold water consumption of a warm wash
For water-heating clothes washers, measure and record the
temperature of each warm wash selection after fill.
3.2.2 Total water consumption during the energy test cycle shall be
measured, including hot and cold water consumption during wash, deep
rinse, and spray rinse.
3.2.3 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill/manual water fill
control systems
3.2.3.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and
alternate manual water fill control systems. If a clothes washer with an
adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual
controls as an alternative, then both manual and adaptive modes shall be
tested and, for each mode, the energy consumption (HET,
MET, and DE) and water consumption
(QT), values shall be calculated as set forth in section 4.
Then the average of the two values (one from each mode, adaptive and
manual) for each variable shall be used in section 4 for the clothes
washer.
3.2.3.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system.
3.2.3.2.1. Not user adjustable. The maximum, minimum, and average
water levels as defined in the following sections shall be interpreted
to mean that amount of water fill which is selected by the control
system when the respective test loads are used, as defined in Table 2.8.
The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy
consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
3.2.3.2.2 User adjustable. Four tests shall be conducted on clothes
washers with user adjustable adaptive water fill controls which affect
the relative wash water levels. The first test shall be conducted with
the maximum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system
set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result. The
second test shall be conducted with the minimum test load and with the
adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the
least energy intensive result. The third test shall be conducted with
the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system
set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result for
the given test load. The fourth test shall be conducted with the average
test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the
setting that will give the least energy intensive result for the given
test load. The energy and water consumption for the average test load
and water level, shall be the average of the third and fourth tests.
3.2.3.3 Clothes washers with manual water fill control system. In
accordance with Table 2.8, the water fill selector shall be set to the
maximum water level available on the clothes washer for the maximum test
load size and set to the minimum water level for the minimum test load
size. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy
consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
Table 3.2--Test Section Reference
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max. Wash Temp. Available................................ <=135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C)
135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C) \2\
Number of Wash Temp. Selections.......................... 1 2 135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C)) for water heating clothes washers only. Water and electrical
energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or
test load size as specified in 3.3.1 through 3.3.3 for the hottest wash
setting available.
3.3.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hmx), cold water consumption (Cmx), and
electrical energy consumption (Emx) shall be measured for an
extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for
the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used
and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
[[Page 202]]
3.3.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hmn), cold water consumption (Cmn), and
electrical energy consumption (Emn) shall be measured for an
extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for
the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used
and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.3.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water
consumption (Hma), cold water consumption (Cma),
and electrical energy consumption (Ema) for an extra hot
wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as
determined per Table 5.1.
3.4 ``Hot Wash'' (Max Wash Temp<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)). Water
and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill
level or test load size as specified in 3.4.1 through 3.4.3 for a 135
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash, if available, or for the hottest selection
less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)).
3.4.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hhx), cold water consumption (Chx), and
electrical energy consumption (Ehx) shall be measured for a
hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the
maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.4.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hhn), cold water consumption (Chn), and
electrical energy consumption (Ehn) shall be measured for a
hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the
minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.4.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water
consumption (Hha), cold water consumption (Cha),
and electrical energy consumption (Eha) for a hot wash/cold
rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined
per Table 5.1.
3.5 ``Warm Wash.'' Water and electrical energy consumption shall be
determined for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified
in 3.5.1 through 3.5.2.3 for the applicable warm water wash
temperature(s).
3.5.1 Clothes washers with uniformly distributed warm wash
temperature selection(s). The reportable values to be used for the warm
water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of the measurements
for the hot and cold wash selections. This is a calculation only, no
testing is required.
3.5.2 Clothes washers that lack uniformly distributed warm wash
temperature selections. For a clothes washer with fewer than four
discrete warm wash selections, test all warm wash temperature
selections. For a clothes washer that offers four or more warm wash
selections, test at all discrete selections, or test at 25 percent, 50
percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device
between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the
coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50 or 75
percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection use the
next warmer setting. Each reportable value to be used for the warm water
wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of all tests conducted
pursuant to this section.
3.5.2.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hwx), cold water consumption (Cwx), and
electrical energy consumption (Ewx) shall be measured with
the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load
size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.5.2.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hwn), cold water consumption (Cwn), and
electrical energy consumption (Ewn) shall be measured with
the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load
size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.5.2.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with
an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water
consumption (Hwa), cold water consumption (Cwa),
and electrical energy consumption (Ewa) with an average test
load size as determined per Table 5.1.
3.6 ``Cold Wash'' (Minimum Wash Temperature Selection). Water and
electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill
level or test load size as specified in 3.6.1 through 3.6.3 for the
coldest wash temperature selection available.
3.6.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hcx), cold water consumption (Ccx), and
electrical energy consumption (Ecx) shall be measured for a
cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the
maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.6.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption
(Hcn), cold water consumption (Ccn), and
electrical energy consumption (Ecn) shall be measured for a
cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the
minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and
shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.6.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an
adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water
consumption (Hca), cold water consumption (Cca),
and electrical energy consumption (Eca) for a cold wash/cold
rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined
per Table 5.1.
3.7 Warm Rinse. Tests in sections 3.7.1 and 3.7.2 shall be conducted
with the hottest rinse temperature available. If multiple wash
temperatures are available with the hottest rinse temperature, any
``warm wash''
[[Page 203]]
temperature may be selected to conduct the tests.
3.7.1 For the rinse only, measure the amount of hot water consumed
by the clothes washer including all deep and spray rinses, for the
maximum (Rx), minimum (Rn), and, if required by
section 3.5.2.3, average (Ra) test load sizes or water fill
levels.
3.7.2 Measure the amount of electrical energy consumed by the
clothes washer to heat the rinse water only, including all deep and
spray rinses, for the maximum (ERx), minimum
(ERn), and, if required by section 3.5.2.3, average
(ERa), test load sizes or water fill levels.
3.8 Remaining Moisture Content:
3.8.1 The wash temperature will be the same as the rinse temperature
for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 and
section 3.1 for testing.
3.8.2 For clothes washers with cold rinse only:
3.8.2.1 Record the actual `bone dry' weight of the test load
(WImax), then place the test load in the clothes washer.
3.8.2.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.8.2.3 Run the energy test cycle.
3.8.2.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after
completion of the energy test cycle (WCmax).
3.8.2.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test
load, RMCMAX, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMCmax=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options:
3.8.3.1 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for cold rinse.
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for
cold rinse, RMCCOLD, expressed as a percentage and defined
as:
RMCCOLD=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3.2 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for warm rinse.
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for
warm rinse, RMCWARM, expressed as a percentage and defined
as:
RMCWARM=((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3.3 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test
load, RMCmax, expressed as a percentage and defined as:
RMCmax=RMCCOLDx(1-
TUFr)+RMCWARMx(TUFr).
where:
TUFr is the temperature use factor for warm rinse as defined
in Table 4.1.1.
3.8.4 Clothes washers which have options that result in different
RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times,
that are available in the energy test cycle, shall be tested at the
maximum and minimum extremes of the available options, excluding any
``no spin'' (zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements
in 3.8.2 or 3.8.3. The calculated RMCmax extraction and
RMCmin extraction at the maximum and minimum settings,
respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final RMC to be used
in section 4.3 shall be:
RMC = 0.75xRMCmax extraction+0.25x
RMCmin extraction
4. CALCULATION OF DERIVED RESULTS FROM TEST MEASUREMENTS
4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes
washers.
4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for
maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels using each appropriate
load size as defined in section 2.8 and Table 5.1. Calculate for the
cycle under test the per-cycle temperature weighted hot water
consumption for the maximum water fill level, Vhx, the
average water fill level, Vha, and the minimum water fill
level, Vhn, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per
cycle) and defined as:
(a)
Vhx=[HmxxTUFm]+[HhxxTUFh
]+[Hwx
xTUFw]+[HcxxTUFc]+[RxxTUFr
]
(b)
Vha=[HmaxTUFm]+[HhaxTUFh
]+[Hwa
xTUFw]+[HcaxTUFc]+[RaxTUFr
]
(c)
Vhn=[HmnxTUFm]+[HhnxTUFh
]+[Hwn
xTUFw]+[HcnxTUFc]+[RnxTUFr
]
where:
Hmx, Hma, and Hmn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the extra-
hot wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section
2.8.
Hhx, Hha, and Hhn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the hot wash
cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Hwx, Hwa, and Hwn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the warm
wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Hcx, Hca, and Hcn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the cold
wash cycle with the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
Rx, Ra, and Rn are the reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per cycle), at
maximum, average, and minimum water fill, respectively, for the warm
rinse cycle and the appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.
TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and
TUFr are temperature use factors for extra hot wash,
[[Page 204]]
hot wash, warm wash, cold wash, and warm rinse temperature selections,
respectively, and are as defined in Table 4.1.1.
Table 4.1.1--Temperature Use Factors
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max Wash Temp Available....... <=135 [deg]F <=135 [deg]F <=135 [deg]F 135 135
[deg]F [deg]F
(57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C)
No. Wash Temp Selections...... Single 2 Temps 2 3 Temps 3
Temps Temps
TUFm (extra hot).............. NA NA NA 0.14 0.05
TUFh (hot).................... NA 0.63 0.14 NA 0.09
TUFw (warm)................... NA NA 0.49 0.49 0.49
TUFc (cold)................... 1.00 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37
TUFr (warm rinse)............. 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all maximum,
average, and minimum water fill levels tested. Calculate the total per-
cycle hot water energy consumption for the maximum water fill level,
HEmax, the minimum water fill level, HEmin, and
the average water fill level, HEavg, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle and defined as:
(a) HEmax = [VhxxTxK]=Total energy when a maximum
load is tested.
(b) HEavg = [VhaxTxK]=Total energy when an average
load is tested.
(c) HEmin = [VhnxTxK]=Total energy when a minimum
load is tested.
where:
T=Temperature rise=75 [deg]F (41.7 [deg]C).
K=Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon degree F=0.00240
(0.00114 kWh/L-[deg]C).
Vhx Vha, and Vhn, are as defined in
4.1.1.
4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption.
Calculate the total weighted per cycle hot water energy consumption,
HET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
HET=[HEmaxxFmax]+[HEavgxFavg
]+[HEmnxFmin]
where:
HEmax, HEavg, and HEmin are as defined
in 4.1.2.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are the load usage
factors for the maximum, average, and minimum test loads based on the
size and type of control system on the washer being tested. The values
are as shown in table 4.1.3.
Table 4.1.3--Load Usage Factors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water fill control system Manual Adaptive
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fmax =.......................................... 0.72 \1\ 0.12 \2\
Favg =.......................................... .......... 0.74 \2\
Fmin=........................................... 0.28 \1\ 0.14 \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Reference 3.2.3.3.
\2\ Reference 3.2.3.2.
4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated
or oil-heated water. Calculate for the energy test cycle the per-cycle
hot water consumption, HETG, using gas heated or oil-heated
water, expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined
as:
HETG=HTx1/ex3412 Btu/kWh or
HETG=HETx1/ex3.6 MJ/kWh
where:
e=Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency=0.75.
HET=As defined in 4.1.3.
4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all
maximum, average, and minimum test load sizes. Calculate the total per-
cycle machine electrical energy consumption for the maximum water fill
level, MEmax, the minimum water fill level, MEmin,
and the average water fill level, MEavg, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
(a)MEmax= [EmxxTUFm]+
[EhxxTUFh]+ [EwxxTUFw]+
[EcxxTUFc]+ [ERxxTUFr]
(b) MEavg= [EmaxTUFm]+
[EhaxTUFh]+ [EwaxTUFw]+
[EcaxTUFc]+ [ERaxTUFr]
(c) MEmin= [EmnxTUFm]+
[EhnxTUFh]+ [EwnxTUFw]+
[EcnxxTUFc]+ [ERnxTUFr]
where:
Emx, Ema, and Emn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the extra-
hot wash cycle.
Ehx, Eha, and Ehn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the hot wash
cycle.
Ewx, Ewa, and Ewn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the warm
wash cycle.
Ecx, Eca, and Ecn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the cold
wash cycle.
[[Page 205]]
ERx, ERa, ERn, are reported electrical
energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at maximum,
average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for the warm rinse cycle
per definitions in 3.7.2 of this appendix.
TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and
TUFr are as defined in Table 4.1.1.
4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy
consumption. Calculate the total per cycle load size weighted energy
consumption, MET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and
defined as:
MET=[MEmaxx Fmax]+[MEavgx
Favg]+[MEminx Fmin]
where:
MEmax, MEavg, and MEmin are as defined
in 4.1.5.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
Table 4.1.3.
4.1.7 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated
water is used. Calculate for the energy test cycle the total per-cycle
energy consumption, ETE, using electrical heated water,
expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:
ETE=HET+MET
where:
MET=As defined in 4.1.6.
HET=As defined in 4.1.3.
4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers. (The calculations in this
Section need not be performed to determine compliance with the energy
conservation standards for clothes washers.)
4.2.1 Per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the maximum, average,
and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or
liters per cycle), for the cold wash/cold rinse cycle and defined as:
Qmax=[Hcx+Ccx]
Qavg=[Hca+Cca]
Qmin=[Hcn+Ccn]
where:
Hcx, Ccx, Hca, Cca,
Hcn, and Ccn are as defined in 3.6.
4.2.2 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the
total weighted per cycle consumption, QT, expressed in
gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as:
QT=[QmaxxFmax]+[QavgxFavg
]+[QminxFmin]
where:
Qmax, Qavg, and Qmin are as defined in
4.2.1.
Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
table 4.1.3.
4.2.3 Water consumption factor. Calculate the water consumption
factor, WCF, expressed in gallon per cycle per cubic feet (or liter per
cycle per liter), as:
WCF=QT / C
where:
QT=as defined in section 4.2.2.
C = as defined in section 3.1.5.
4.3 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test
load. Calculate the per-cycle energy required to remove the moisture of
the test load, DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and
defined as
DE=(LAF)x(Maximum test load weight)x(RMC--4%)x(DEF)x(DUF)
where:
LAF=Load adjustment factor=0.52.
Test load weight=As required in 3.8.1, expressed in lbs/cycle.
RMC=As defined in 3.8.2.5, 3.8.3.3 or 3.8.4.
DEF=nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from
clothes=0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).
DUF=dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes
dryer=0.84.
4.4 Modified energy factor. Calculate the modified energy factor,
MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per
kilowatt-hour per cycle) and defined as:
MEF=C/(ETE + DE)
where:
C=As defined in 3.1.5.
ETE=As defined in 4.1.7.
DE=As defined in 4.3.
4.5 Energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in
cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hour per
cycle) and defined as:
EF=C/ETE
where:
C=As defined in 3.1.5.
ETE=As defined in 4.1.7.
5. TEST LOADS
Table 5.1--Test Load Sizes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Container volume Minimum load Maximum load Average load
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(liter) = < thn-eq>= < lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0-0.8..................................... 0-22.7 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36
0.80-0.90................................. 22.7-25.5 3.00 1.36 3.50 1.59 3.25 1.47
0.90-1.00................................. 25.5-28.3 3.00 1.36 3.90 1.77 3.45 1.56
[[Page 206]]
1.00-1.10................................. 28.3-31.1 3.00 1.36 4.30 1.95 3.65 1.66
1.10-1.20................................. 31.1-34.0 3.00 1.36 4.70 2.13 3.85 1.75
1.20-1.30................................. 34.0-36.8 3.00 1.36 5.10 2.31 4.05 1.84
1.30-1.40................................. 36.8-39.6 3.00 1.36 5.50 2.49 4.25 1.93
1.40-1.50................................. 39.6-42.5 3.00 1.36 5.90 2.68 4.45 2.02
1.50-1.60................................. 42.5-45.3 3.00 1.36 6.40 2.90 4.70 2.13
1.60-1.70................................. 45.3-48.1 3.00 1.36 6.80 3.08 4.90 2.22
1.70-1.80................................. 48.1-51.0 3.00 1.36 7.20 3.27 5.10 2.31
1.80-1.90................................. 51.0-53.8 3.00 1.36 7.60 3.45 5.30 2.40
1.90-2.00................................. 53.8-56.6 3.00 1.36 8.00 3.63 5.50 2.49
2.00-2.10................................. 56.6-59.5 3.00 1.36 8.40 3.81 5.70 2.59
2.10-2.20................................. 59.5-62.3 3.00 1.36 8.80 3.99 5.90 2.68
2.20-2.30................................. 62.3-65.1 3.00 1.36 9.20 4.17 6.10 2.77
2.30-2.40................................. 65.1-68.0 3.00 1.36 9.60 4.35 6.30 2.86
2.40-2.50................................. 68.0-70.8 3.00 1.36 10.00 4.54 6.50 2.95
2.50-2.60................................. 70.8-73.6 3.00 1.36 10.50 4.76 6.75 3.06
2.60-2.70................................. 73.6-76.5 3.00 1.36 10.90 4.94 6.95 3.15
2.70-2.80................................. 76.5-79.3 3.00 1.36 11.30 5.13 7.15 3.24
2.80-2.90................................. 79.3-82.1 3.00 1.36 11.70 5.31 7.35 3.33
2.90-3.00................................. 82.1-85.0 3.00 1.36 12.10 5.49 7.55 3.42
3.00-3.10................................. 85.0-87.8 3.00 1.36 12.50 5.67 7.75 3.52
3.10-3.20................................. 87.8-90.6 3.00 1.36 12.90 5.85 7.95 3.61
3.20-3.30................................. 90.6-93.4 3.00 1.36 13.30 6.03 8.15 3.70
3.30-3.40................................. 93.4-96.3 3.00 1.36 13.70 6.21 8.35 3.79
3.40-3.50................................. 96.3-99.1 3.00 1.36 14.10 6.40 8.55 3.88
3.50-3.60................................. 99.1-101.9 3.00 1.36 14.60 6.62 8.80 3.99
3.60-3.70................................. 101.9-104.8 3.00 1.36 15.00 6.80 9.00 4.08
3.70-3.80................................. 104.8-107.6 3.00 1.36 15.40 6.99 9.20 4.17
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
(1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.
(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are +-0.10 lbs (0.05 kg).
6. WAIVERS AND FIELD TESTING
6.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Non-conventional Clothes Washers.
Manufacturers of nonconventional clothes washers, such as clothes
washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver
pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for
that clothes washer. For these and other clothes washers that have
controls or systems such that the DOE test procedures yield results that
are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption
characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data,
field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable test
procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may be
used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These
guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they
do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's
approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required.
Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to
the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition
for waiver. Section 6.3 provides an example of field testing for a
clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other
features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the
subject of field tests.
6.2 Nonconventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field
test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes
washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being
distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should
include a minimum of 50 energy test cycles per clothes washer. The test
clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in
construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal
numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer
should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize
seasonal or consumer laundering conditions or variations. The clothes
washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately record the
total energy consumption per cycle. At a minimum, the following should
be measured and recorded throughout the test period for each clothes
washer: Hot water usage in gallons (or liters), electrical energy usage
in kilowatt-hours, and the cycles of usage.
The field test results would be used to determine the best method to
correlate the rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the
base clothes washer. If the base
[[Page 207]]
clothes washer is rated at A kWh per year, but field tests at B kWh per
year, and the test clothes washer field tests at D kWh per year, the
test unit would be rated as follows:
Ax(D/B)=G kWh per year
6.3 Adaptive water fill control system field test. Section 3.2.3.1
defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes
washers which incorporate control systems having both adaptive and
alternate cycle selections. Energy consumption calculated by the method
defined in section 3.2.3.1 assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50
percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data
in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the
adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field
test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The
test clothes washers should be totally representative of the design,
construction, and control system that will be placed in commerce. The
duration of field testing in the user's house should be a minimum of 50
energy test cycles, for each unit. No special instructions as to cycle
selection or product usage should be given to the field test
participants, other than inclusion of the product literature pack which
would be shipped with all units, and instructions regarding filling out
data collection forms, use of data collection equipment, or basic
procedural methods. Prior to the test clothes washers being installed in
the field test locations, baseline data should be developed for all
field test units by conducting laboratory tests as defined by section 1
through section 5 of these test procedures to determine the energy
consumption, water consumption, and remaining moisture content values.
The following data should be measured and recorded for each wash load
during the test period: wash cycle selected, the mode of the clothes
washer (adaptive or manual), clothes load dry weight (measured after the
clothes washer and clothes dryer cycles are completed) in pounds, and
type of articles in the clothes load (e.g., cottons, linens, permanent
press). The wash loads used in calculating the in-home percentage split
between adaptive and manual cycle usage should be only those wash loads
which conform to the definition of the energy test cycle.
Calculate:
T=The total number of energy test cycles run during the field test
Ta=The total number of adaptive control energy test cycles
Tm=The total number of manual control energy test cycles
The percentage weighting factors:
Pa=(Ta/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for
adaptive control selection)
Pm=(Tm/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for manual
control selection)
Energy consumption (HET, MET, and
DE) and water consumption (QT), values calculated
in section 4 for the manual and adaptive modes, should be combined using
Pa and Pm as the weighting factors.
[62 FR 45508, Aug. 27, 1997; 63 FR 16669, Apr. 6, 1998, as amended at 66
FR 3330, Jan. 12, 2001; 68 FR 62204, Oct. 31, 2003]
Appendixes K-L to Subpart B of Part 430 [RESERVED]
Appendix M to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners
1. definitions
1.1 ``Annual performance factor'' means the total heating and
cooling done by a heat pump in a particular region in one year divided
by the total electric power used in one year.
1.2 ``ARI'' means Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.3 ``ARI Standard 210-79'' means the test standard published in
1979 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning
Equipment''.
1.4 ``ARI Standard 240-77'' means the test standard published in
1977 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Air-Source Unitary Heat Pump
Equipment''.
1.5 ``ARI Standard 320-76'' means the test standard published in
1976 by the ARI and titled ``Standard for Water-Source Heat Pumps''. The
single number HSPF energy conservation standard for central air
conditioning heat pumps specified in section 325(d)(2) (A) and (B) is
based on Region IV and the standardized DHR found in section 6 of this
appendix, nearest the capacity measured in the 47 [deg]F test.
1.6 ``ASHRAE'' means the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
1.7 ``ASHRAE Standard 37-78'' means the test standard published by
ASHRAE in 1978 and titled ``Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-
Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.''
1.8 ``Continuously recorded'' means a method of recording
measurements in intervals no greater than 5 seconds.
1.9 ``Cooling load factor (CLF)'' means the ratio of the total
cooling done in a complete cycle of a specified time period, consisting
of an ``on'' time and ``off'' time, to the steady-state cooling done
over the same period at constant ambient conditions.
1.10 ``Cyclic Test'' means a test where the indoor and outdoor
conditions are held constant, but the unit is manually turned ``on''
[[Page 208]]
and ``off'' for specific time periods to simulate part-load operation.
1.11 ``Degradation coefficient (CD)'' means the measure
of the efficiency loss due to the cycling of the unit.
1.12 ``Demand-defrost control system'' means a system which is
designed to perform the defrost function on the outdoor coil of the heat
pump only when a predetermined degradation of performance is measured.
1.13 ``Design heating requirement (DHR)'' is the amount of heating
required to maintain a given indoor temperature at a particular outdoor
design temperature.
1.14 ``Dry-coil test'' means a test conducted at a wet-bulb
temperature and a dry-bulb temperature such that moisture will not
condense on the evaporator coil of the unit.
1.15 ``Heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF)'' means the total
heating output of a heat pump during its normal annual usage period for
heating divided by the total electric power input during the same
period.
1.16 ``Heating load factor (HLF)'' means the ratio of the total
heating done in a complete cycle of a specified time period, consisting
of an ``on'' time ``off'' time, to the steady state heating done over
the same period at constant ambient conditions.
1.17 ``Latent cooling'' means the amount of cooling in Btu's
necessary to remove water vapor from the air passing over the indoor
coil by condensation during a period of time.
1.18 ``Part-load factor (PLF)'' means the ratio of the cyclic energy
efficiency ratio to the steady-state energy efficiency ratio at
identical ambient conditions.
1.19 ``Seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER)'' means the total
cooling of a central air conditioner in Btu's during its normal annual
usage period for cooling divided by the total electric power input in
watt-hours during the same period.
1.20 ``Sensible cooling'' means the amount of cooling in Btu's
performed by a unit over a period of time, excluding latent cooling.
1.21 ``Single package unit'' means any central air conditioner in
which all the major assemblies are enclosed in one cabinet.
1.22 ``Split system'' means any central air conditioner in which one
or more of the major assemblies are separate from the others.
1.23 ``Steady-state test'' means a test in which all indoor and
outdoor conditions are held constant and the unit is in non-changing
operating mode.
1.24 ``Temperature bin'' means a 5 [deg]F increment over a dry-bulb
temperature range of 65 [deg]F through 104 [deg]F for the cooling cycle
and -25 [deg]F through 64 [deg]F for the heating cycle.
1.25 ``Time-temperature defrost control system'' means a system
which automatically provides the defrost function at a predetermined
time interval whenever the outdoor temperature drops below a level where
frosting will occur.
1.26 ``Test condition tolerance'' means the maximum permissible
variation of the average of the test observations from the standard or
desired test condition as provided in 6.1.1, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.2.3 of
this Appendix.
1.27 ``Test operating tolerance'' means the maximum permissible
difference between the maximum and the minimum instrument observation
during a test as provided in 6.1.1, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.2.3 of this
Appendix.
1.28 ``Wet-coil test'' means a test conducted at a wet-bulb
temperature and a dry-bulb temperature such that moisture will condense
on the test unit evaporator coil.
2. testing required
2.1 Testing required for air source cooling only units. Two steady
state wet coil tests required to be performed, test A and test B. Test A
is to be conducted as an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 95 [deg] F and
test B at 82 [deg] F. Test C and D are optional tests to be conducted
when cyclic performance parameters are to be measured in order to
determine the degradation coefficient, CD Test C is a steady state dry
coil test conducted at an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F.
Test D is a cyclic test also conducted at an outdoor dry bulb
temperature of 82 [deg] F. In lieu of conducting tests C and D, an
assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the degradation coefficient, CD.
2.1.1 Testing required for units with single speed compressors and
single speed condenser fans. Test A and test B shall be performed
according to the test procedures outlined in 4.1 of this Appendix. In
addition, the cyclic performance shall be evaluated by conducting test C
and D according to the requirements outlined in 4.1 of this Appendix.
2.1.2 Testing required for units with single speed compressors and
multiple-speed condenser fans. The test requirements for multiple-speed
condenser fan units shall be the same as described in section 2.1.1 for
single speed condensor fan units.
2.1.3 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors, or cylinder unloading. The test requirements for two-speed
compressor units, two compressor units, or units with cylinder unloading
are the same as described in 2.1.1 of this Appendix except that test A
and test B shall be performed at each compressor speed or at each
compressor capacity.
2.1.4 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors, or cylinder unloading capable of varying the sensible to
total (S/T) capacity ratio. When a unit employing a two-speed
compressor, two compressors, or cylinder unloading provides a method of
varying the ratio of the sensible cooling capacity to the total cooling
capacity,
[[Page 209]]
(S/T), the test requirements are the same as for two-speed compressor
units as described in 2.1.3 of this Appendix.
2.1.5 Testing required for units with triple-capacity compressors.
(Reserved)
2.1.6 Testing required for units with variable-speed compressors.
The tests for variable-speed equipment consist of five (5) wet coil
tests and two (2) dry coil tests. Two of the wet coil tests, A and B,
are conducted at the maximum speed. Two wet coil tests, B2
and low temperature test, are conducted at the minimum speed. The fifth
wet coil test is conducted at an intermediate speed. Dry coil tests, C
and D, are conducted at the minimum speed if the coefficient of
degradation (CD) value of 0.25 is not adopted. The test
conditions and procedures for the above are outlined in sections 3.1 and
4.1 of this Appendix.
2.1.7 Testing required for split-type ductless systems. The tests
for split-type ductless systems are determined by the type of compressor
installed in the outdoor unit. For the appropriate tests refer to
sections 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, or 2.1.6 of this Appendix.
2.2 Testing required for air source heating only units. Four types
of tests are required to be performed: High Temperature, Cyclic, Frost
Accumulation, and Low Temperature. In lieu of conducting the Cyclic Test
an assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the degradation coefficient,
CD.
2.2.1 Testing required for units with single speed compressors.
Units with single speed compressors shall be subjected respectively to
the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F described in section 3.2.1.1,
the Cyclic Test as described in section 3.2.1.2, the Frost Accumulation
Test as described in section 3.2.1.3, and the Low Temperature Test as
described in section 3.2.1.4.
2.2.2 Testing required for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors, or cylinder unloading. With the unit operating: at high
compressors speed (two-speed compressor), with both compressors in
operation (two-compressors), or at the maximum capacity (cylinder
unloading); the following tests are required to be performed on all
units; the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F, the Frost Accumulation
Test, and the Low Temperature Test. An additional test (cyclic at 47
[deg] F) is required, with the unit operating at the high compressor
speed (two-speed compressor), with both compressors in operation (two
compressors), or at the maximum capacity (cylinder unloading); if the
normal mode of operation requires cycling ``on'' and ``off'' of the
compressor(s) at high speed or maximum capacity.
With the unit operating: at the low compressor speed (two-speed
compressor), with the single compressor which normally operates at low
loads (two compressors), or at the low compressor capacity (cylinder
unloading); the following tests are required to be performed on all
units: the High Temperature Test at 47 [deg] F, the High Temperature
Test at 62 [deg] F, and the Cyclic Test. Additional tests, (Frost
Accumulation Test and Low Temperature Test) are required, with the unit
operating: on low compressor speed (two-speed compressor), with the
single compressor which normally operates at low loads (two compressors)
or at the low compressor capacity (cylinder unloading), if the unit's
low speed, one compressor or low capacity performance at and below 40
[deg] F is needed to calculate its seasonal performance.
2.2.3 Testing required for units with triple-capacity compressors.
(Reserved)
2.2.4 Testing required for units with variable-speed compressors.
There are seven basic tests and one optional test for variable-speed
units. Three tests (high temperature test, low temperature test, and
frost accumulation test) are performed at the maximum speed. Three tests
(two high temperature and one cyclic test) are performed with the unit
operating at minimum speed. A second frost accumulation test is
performed at an intermediate speed. The intermediate speed is the same
as in the cooling mode.
In lieu of the maximum speed frost accumulation test, two equations
are provided in section 4.2 of this Appendix. In lieu of the cyclic test
an assigned value of 0.25 may be used for the coefficient of degradation
CD. The optional test is a nominal capacity test applicable
to units which have a heating mode maximum speed greater than the
cooling mode maximum speed. The conditions and procedures for the above
tests are described in sections 3.2 and 4.2 respectively, of this
Appendix.
2.2.5 Testing required for split-type ductless system. The type of
compressor installed in the outdoor unit determines the testing
required, refer to previous sections 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 2.2.3, or 2.2.4. The
conditions and procedures will be modified as indicated for the various
types as stated in sections 3.2 and 4.2 respectively.
2.3 Testing required for air source units which provide both heating
and cooling. The requirements for units which provide both heating and
cooling shall be the same as the requirements in Section 2.1. and 2.2 of
this Appendix.
3. testing conditions
3.1 Testing conditions for air source cooling only units. The test
room requirement and equipment installation procedures are the same as
those specified in sections 11.1 and 11.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78.
Units designed for both horizontal and vertical installation shall be
tested in the orientation in which they are most frequently installed.
All tests shall be performed at the normal residential voltage and
frequency for which the equipment is designed (either 115 or 230 volts
and 60 hertz), the test installation shall
[[Page 210]]
be designed such that there will be no air flow through the cooling coil
due to natural or forced convection while the indoor fan is ``off''.
This shall be accomplished by installing dampers upstream and downstream
of the test unit to block the off period air flow. Values of capacity
for rating purposes are to be rounded off to the nearest 100 Btu/hour
for capacities less than 20,000 Btu/hour; to the nearest 200 Btu/hour
for capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/hour; and to the nearest
500 Btu/hour for capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/hour.
The following conditions listed in ARI Standard 210.79 shall apply
to all tests performed in Section 3.1 of this Appendix:
5.1.3.4 Cooling Coil Air Quantity.
5.1.3.6 Requirements for Separated Assemblies.
3.1.1 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors and
single speed condenser fans.
3.1.1.1 Steady state wet-coil performance tests (Test A and Test B).
Test A and test B shall be performed with the air entering the indoor
side of the unit having a dry-bulb temperature of 80 [deg] F and a wet-
bulb temperature of 87 [deg] F. The dry-bulb temperature of the air
entering the outdoor side of the unit shall be 95 [deg] F in test A and
82 [deg] F in test B. The temperature of the air surrounding the outdoor
side of the unit in each test shall be the same as the outdoor entering
air temperature except for units or sections thereof intended to be
installed only indoors, in which case the dry-bulb temperature
surrounding that indoor side of the unit shall be 80 [deg] F. For those
units which reject condensate to the condenser, located in the outdoor
side of the unit, the outdoor wet-bulb temperature surrounding the
outdoor side of the unit shall be 75 [deg] F in test A and 65 [deg] F in
test B.
3.1.1.2 Steady state dry coil performance test (Test C) and cyclic
dry coil performance test (Test D). Test C and test D shall be performed
with the air entering the indoor side of the unit having a dry-bulb
temperature of 80 [deg] F and a wet-bulb temperature which does not
result in formation of condensate on the indoor coil. (It is recommended
that an indoor wet-bulb temperature of 57 [deg] F or less be used.) The
dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the outdoor portion of the unit
shall be 82 [deg] F. The outdoor portion of the unit shall be subject to
the same conditions as the requirements for conducting test B as stated
previously in section 3.1.1.1. Test C shall be conducted with the unit
operating steadily. Test D shall be conducted by cycling the unit ``on''
and ``off'' by manual or automatic operation of the normal control
circuit of the unit. The unit shall cycle with the compressor ``on'' for
6 minutes and ``off'' for 24 minutes. The indoor fan shall also cycle
``on'' and ``off'', the duration of the indoor fan ``on'' and ``off''
periods being governed by the automatic controls which the manufacturer
normally supplies with the unit. The results of tests C and D shall be
used to calculate a degradation coefficient, CD by the
procedures outlined in 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.1.2 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors and
multiple-speed condenser fans. The condenser fan speed to be used in
test A shall be that speed which normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb
temperature of 95 [deg] F, and for test B, the fan speed shall be that
which normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F.
If elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be conducted at the same
condenser fan speed as in test B.
3.1.3 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors, or cylinder unloading. The condenser fan speed used in
conducting test A at each compressor speed shall be that which normally
occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 95 [deg] F. For test B, the
condenser fan speed at each compressor speed shall be that which
normally occurs at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F. If
elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be conducted at the low
compressor speed with the same condenser fan speed as used in test B.
For those two-speed units in which the normal mode of operation involves
cycling the compressor ``on'' and ``off'' at high speed, tests C and D
shall also be performed with the compressor operating at high speed and
at a condenser fan speed that normally occurs at test A ambient
conditions. Units consisting of two compressors are subject to the same
requirements as those units containing two-speed compressors, except
that when operated at high speed, both compressors shall be operating
and when operating at low speed, only the compressor which normally
operates at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of 82 [deg] F shall be
operating.
In lieu of conducting tests C and D, an assigned value of 0.25 may
be used for the degradation coefficient, CD , at each
compressor speed. If the assigned degradation coefficient is used for
one compressor speed it must also be used for the other compressor
speed.
In the case of units with cylinder unloading, the loaded and the
unloaded conditions correspond to high and low compressor speed on two-
speed units respectively.
3.1.4 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors, or cylinder unloading capable of varying the sensible to
total (S/T) capacity ratio. The mode of operation selected for
controlling the S/T ratio in the performance of test A and test B at
each compressor speed shall be such that it does not result in an
operating configuration which is not typical of a normal residential
installation. If elected to be performed, tests C and D shall be
conducted at low compressor speed (single compressor operating)
[[Page 211]]
with the same S/T control mode as used in test B when performed at the
low compressor speed. Likewise, tests C and D shall also be conducted at
high compressor speed (two compressors operating) and with the same S/T
control mode as in test A when performed at the high compressor speed.
In the case of units with cylinder unloading, the loaded and
unloaded conditions correspond to high and low compressor speed on two-
speed units respectively.
3.1.5 Testing conditions for units with triple-capacity compressors.
(Reserved)
3.1.6 Additional testing conditions for cooling-only units with
variable-speed compressors. For cooling-only units and air-source heat
pumps with varaible-speed compressors, the air flow rate at fan speeds
less than the maximum fan speed shall be determined by using the fan law
for a fixed resistance system. The air flow rate is given by the ratio
of the actual fan speed to the maximum fan speed multiplied by the air
flow rate at the maximum fan speed. Minimum static pressure requirements
only apply when the fan is running at the maximum speed.
3.1.6.1 Testing conditions for steady-state wet coil tests. Tests A
and B shall be performed at the maximum speed at conditions specified in
section 3.1.1 of this Appendix. Test B2 and the low
temperature test are performed at the minimum speed with outdoor dry
bulb temperatures of 82 [deg]F and 67 [deg]F respectively. The
intermediate speed wet coil test is performed at the outdoor dry bulb
temperature of 87 [deg]F. For units which reject condensate the outdoor
wet bulb temperature shall be maintained at 75 [deg]F for Test A, 65
[deg]F for Tests B and B2, 53.5 [deg]F for the low
temperature test and 69 [deg]F for the intermediate test. The indoor
conditions for all wet coil tests are the same as those given in section
3.1.1 of this Appendix.
3.1.6.2 Test conditions for dry coil tests. Dry coil Tests C and D
are conducted at an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 67 [deg]F. For units
which reject condensate the outdoor wet bulb temperature shall be
maintained at 53.5 [deg]F. The indoor dry bulb temperature shall be 80
[deg]F and the wet bulb temperature shall be sufficiently low so no
condensation occurs on the evaporator (It is recommended that an indoor
wet bulb temperature of 57 [deg]F or less be used).
3.1.7 Split-type ductless systems. Test conditions shall be the same
as those specified for the same single outdoor unit compressor type,
assuming it was matched with a single indoor coil.
3.1.7.1 Interconnection. For split-type ductless systems, all
standard rating tests shall be performed with a minimum length of 25
feet of interconnecting tubing between each indoor fan-coil unit and the
common outdoor unit. Such equipment in which the interconnection tubing
is furnished as an integral part of the machine not recommended for
cutting to length shall be tested with complete length of tubing
furnished, or with 25 feet of tubing, whichever is greater. At least 10
feet of the interconnection tubing shall be exposed to the outside
conditions. The line sizes, insulation and details of installation shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendation.
3.1.7.2 Control testing conditions for split-type ductless systems.
For split-type ductless systems, a single control circuit shall be
substituted for any multiple thermostats in order to maintain a uniform
cycling rate during test D and the high temperature heating cyclic test.
During the steady-state tests, all thermostats shall be shunted
resulting in all indoor fan-coil units being in operation.
3.1.7.3 Split-type ductless systems with multiple coils or multiple
discharge outlets shall have short plenums attached to each outlet. Each
plenum shall discharge into a single common duct section, the duct
section in turn discharging into the air measuring device (or a suitable
dampering device when direct air measurement is not employed). Each
plenum shall have an adjustable restrictor located in the plane where
the plenums enter the common duct section for the purpose of equalizing
the static pressures in each plenum. The length of the plenum is a
minimum of 2.5x(AxB).5, A=width and B=height of duct or
outlet. Static pressure readings are taken at a distance of
2x(AxB).5 from the outlet.
3.2 Testing conditions for air source heating only units. The
equipment under test shall be installed according to the requirements of
Section 11.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 and Section 5.1.4.5 of ARI
Standard 240-77. Test chamber requirements are the same as given in
Section 11.1 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. Units designed for both
horizontal and vertical installation shall be tested in the orientation
in which they are most often installed. All tests shall be performed at
the normal residential voltage and frequency for which the equipment is
designed (either 115 or 230 volts and 60 hertz). Values of capacity for
rating purposes are to be rounded off to the nearest 100 Btu/hour for
capacities less than 20,000 Btu/hour; to the nearest 200 Btu/hour for
capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/hour; and to the nearest 500
Btu/hour for capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/hour.
3.2.1 Testing conditions for units with single speed compressors.
3.2.1.1 High temperature test conditions. The High Temperature Test
at 47 [deg] F shall be conducted at an outdoor dry-bulb temperature of
47 [deg] F and an outdoor wet-bulb temperature at 43 [deg] F. The High
Temperature Test at 62 [deg] F shall be conducted at an outdoor dry-bulb
temperature of 62 [deg] F and an outdoor wet-bulb temperature of 56.5
[deg] F. For both tests, the dry-bulb air temperature entering and
surrounding the indoor portion of the
[[Page 212]]
unit shall be 70 [deg] F and a maximum wet-bulb temperature of 60 [deg]
F. The duration of the tests shall be for a minimum of \1/2\ hour.
3.2.1.2 Cycling test conditions. The Cycling Test at 47 [deg]F shall
be conducted at the same dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperature as the High
Temperature Test at 47 [deg]F as described in 3.2.1.1. During the
Cycling Test, the indoor fan shall cycle ``on'' and ``off'', as the
compressor cycles ``on'' and ``off'', except that the indoor fan cycling
times may be delayed due to controls that are normally installed with
the unit. The compressor cycling times shall be 6 minutes ``On'' and 24
minutes ``off.'' The test installation shall be designed such that there
will be no airflow through the indoor unit due to natural or forced
convection while the indoor fan is ``off.'' This shall be accomplished
by installing dampers upstream and downstream of the test unit to block
the off period airflow.
3.2.1.3 Frost accumulation test conditions. The dry-bulb temperature
and the resultant dew-point temperature of the air entering the outdoor
portion of the unit shall be 35 [deg]F and 30 [deg]F respectively. The
indoor dry-bulb temperature shall be 70 [deg]F and the maximum indoor
wet-bulb temperature shall be 60 [deg]F. The Frost Accumulation Test
requires that the unit undergo a defrost prior to the actual test. The
test then begins at defrost termination and ends at the next defrost
termination. Defrost termination occurs when the controls normally
installed within the unit are actuated to cause it to change defrost
operation to normal heating operation. During the test, auxiliary
resistance heaters shall not be employed during either the heating or
defrost portion of the test.
3.2.1.4 Low temperature test conditions. The Low Temperature Test
shall be conducted at a dry-bulb temperature entering the outdoor
portion of the unit of 17 [deg]F and a wet-bulb temperature of 15
[deg]F. The air entering the indoor portion of the unit shall have a
dry-bulb temperature of 70 [deg]F and a maximum wet-bulb temperature of
60 [deg]F.
3.2.1.5 Additional testing conditions. All tests shall be conducted
at the indoor-side air quantities specified in Sections 4.1.4.3 and
5.1.4.6 and Table 2 of ARI Standard 240-77. The following conditions
listed in ARI Standard 240-77 shall apply to all tests performed in
Section 3.2 of this Appendix.
3.2.3 Testing conditions for units with triple-capacity compressors.
(Reserved)
3.2.4 Testing conditions for units with variable-speed compressors.
The testing condition for variable-speed compressors shall be the same
as those for single speed units as described in section 3.2.1 of this
Appendix with the following exceptions; the cyclic test is performed
with an outdoor dry bulb temperature of 62 [deg]F and a wet bulb
temperature of 56.5 [deg]F. The optional, nominal capacity test shall be
performed at the conditions specified for the 47 [deg]F high temperature
test.
3.2.5 Testing conditions for split-type ductless system. The testing
conditions for split-type ductless systems shall be based on the type of
compressor installed in the single outdoor unit. The heating mode shall
have the same piping and control requirements as in 3.1.7.
5.4.4.4 Outdoor-Side Air Quantity; and
5.1.4.5 Requirements for Separated Assemblies.
In all tests, the specified dry-bulb temperature entering the outdoor
portion of the unit also applies to the air temperature surrounding the
outdoor portion of the unit. Similarly, models where portions are
intended to be installed indoors shall have the air temperature
surrounding that portion of the unit the same as the indoor air
temperature.
3.2.2 Testing conditions for units with two-speed compressors, two
compressors or cylinder unloading. The testing conditions for two-speed
compressors, two compressors, or cylinder unloading shall be the same as
those for single speed units as described in 3.2.1.
3.3 Testing conditions for air source units which provide both
heating and cooling. The testing conditions for units which provide both
heating and cooling shall be the same as the requirements in Sections
3.1 and 3.2 of this Appendix.
4.0 Testing procedures. Measure all electrical inputs as described
in the procedures below. All electrical measurements during all ``on''
and ``off'' periods shall include auxiliary power or energy (controls,
transformers, crankcase heaters, etc.) delivered to the unit.
4.1 Test procedures for air source cooling-only units. All steady-
state wet- and dry-coil performance tests on single package units shall
simultaneously employ the Air-Enthalpy Method (Section 3 of ASHRAE
Standard 37-78) on the indoor side and one other method consisting of
either the Air-Enthalpy Method or the Compressor Calibration Method
(Section 4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 on the outdoor side. All steady-
state wet- and dry-coil performance tests on split systems shall
simultaneously employ the Air-Enthalpy Method or the Compressor
Calibration Method on the indoor side and the Air-Enthalpy Method, the
Compressor Calibration Method or the Volatile Refrigerant Flow Method
(Section 5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78) on the outside. All cyclic dry-coil
performance tests shall employ the Air-Enthalpy Method, indoor side
only. The values calculated from the two test methods must agree within
6 percent in order to constitute a valid test. Only the results from the
Air-Enthalpy Method on the indoor side shall be used in the calculations
in Section 5.1. Units shall be installed and tested in such a manner
that when operated under steady-state conditions, the cooling coil and
condenser
[[Page 213]]
coil air flows meet the requirements of Sections 5.1.3.4, 5.1.3.5, and
5.1.3.7 of ARI Standard 210.79.
4.1.1 Test operating procedures.
4.1.1.1 Steady-state wet-coil performance tests (Test A and Test B).
Steady-state wet-coil performance tests (A and B) shall be conducted in
accordance with the conditions described in sections 3.1.1.1, 3.1.2,
3.1.3, 3.1.4, and 3.1.5 of this Appendix and the procedures described
for cooling tests in Section 11.3 of ASHRAE standard 37-78 and evaluated
in accordance with the cooling-related requirements of Section 12 of the
ASHRAE Standard 37-78. The test room reconditioning apparatus and the
equipment under test shall be operated until equilibrium conditions are
attained.
4.1.1.2 Steady-state and cyclic dry-coil performance tests (Test C
and Test D). The steady-state and cyclic dry-coil tests (C and D) shall
be conducted as described below in accordance with the conditions
described in sections 3.1.1.2, 3.1.2, 3.1.3, 3.1.4, and 3.1.5 of this
Appendix. The results shall be evaluated in accordance with the cooling
related requirements of Sections 12.1.5, 12.1.6, 12.1.7, of ASHRAE
Standard 37.78. The test room reconditioning apparatus and the equipment
under test shall be operated until equilibrium conditions are attained,
but not for less than one hour before data for test C are recorded. For
all equipment test methods including the Compressor Calibration Method,
test C shall be performed with data recorded at 10-minute intervals
until four consecutive sets of readings are attained with the tolerance
prescribed in Section 11.6 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. When the Air-
Enthalpy Method is used on the outdoor side for test C, the requirements
of this section shall apply to both the preliminary test and the regular
equipment test; the requirements of Section 3.6 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78
shall also apply. Immediately after test C is completed the test unit
shall be manually cycled ``off'' and ``on'' using the time periods from
3.1.1 of this Appendix until steadily repeating ambient conditions are
again achieved in both the indoor and outdoor test chambers, but for not
less than 2 complete ``off''/``on'' cycles. Without a break in the
cycling pattern, the unit shall be run through an additional ``off''/
``on'' cycle during which the test data required in 5.1 shall be
recorded. During this last cycle, which is referred to as the test
cycle, the indoor and outdoor test room ambient conditions shall remain
within the tolerances specified in 4.1.3 of this Appendix during the
cyclic dry-coil tests, all air moving equipment on the condenser side
shall cycle ``on'' and ``off'' when the compressor cycles ``on'' and
``off''. The indoor air moving equipment shall also cycle ``off'' as
governed by any automatic controls normally installed with the unit.
This last requirement applies to units having an indoor fan time delay.
Units not supplied with an indoor fan time delay shall have the indoor
air moving equipment cycle ``on'' and ``off'' as the compressor cycles
``on'' and ``off.''
Cooling cyclic tests for variable-speed units shall be conducted by
cycling the compressor 12 minutes ``on'' and 48 minutes ``off''. The
capacity shall be measured for the integration time ([thetas]), which is
the compressor ``on'' time of 12 minutes or the ``on'' time as extended
by fan delay, if so equipped. The electrical energy shall be measured
for the total integration time ([thetas]cyc) of 60 minutes.
In lieu of conducting C and D tests, an assigned value of 0.25 shall be
used for the degradation coefficient for cooling, CD.
4.1.1.3 Testing procedures for triple-capacity compressors.
(Reserved)
4.1.1.4 Intermediate cooling steady-state test for units with
variable-speed compressors. For units with variable-speed compressors,
an intermediate cooling steady-state test shall be conducted in which
the unit shall be operated at a constant, intermediate compressor speed
(k=i) in which the dry/bulb and wet-bulb temperatures of the air
entering the indoor coil are 80 [deg]FDB and 67
[deg]FWB and the outdoor coil are 87 [deg]DB and
69 [deg]FWB. The tolerances for the dry-bulb and wet-bulb
temperatures of the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils shall be
the test operating tolerance and test condition tolerance specified in
Table 6.1.1 of this Appendix. The intermediate compressor speed shall be
the minimum compressor speed plus one-third the difference between the
maximum and minimum speeds of the cooling mode. (Inter. speed=min.
speed+\1/3\ (max. speed-min. speed.) A tolerance of plus five percent or
the next higher inverter frequency step from that calculated is allowed.
4.1.1.5 Testing procedures for split-type ductless systems. Cyclic
tests of ductless units will be conducted without dampers. The data
cycle shall be preceded by a minimum of two cycles in which the indoor
fan cycles on and off with the compressor. For the data cycle the indoor
fan will operate three minutes prior to compressor cut-on and remain on
for three minutes after compressor cut-off. The integration time for
capacity and power shall be from compressor cut-on time to indoor fan
cut-off time. The fan power for three minutes after compressor cut-off
shall be added to the integrated cooling capacity.
4.1.2 Test instrumentation. The steady-state and cyclic performance
tests shall have the same requirements pertaining to instrumentation and
data as those specified in Section 10 and Table II of ASHRAE Standard
37.78. For the cyclic dry-coil performance tests, the dry-bulb
temperature of the air entering and leaving the cooling coil, or the
difference between these two dry-bulb temperatures, shall be
continuously recorded with instrumentation accurate to within +-0.3
[deg]F of indicated value and have a response
[[Page 214]]
time of 2.5 seconds or less. Response time in the time required for the
instrumentation to obtain 63 percent of the final steady-state
temperature difference when subjected to a step change in temperature
difference of 15 [deg]F or more. Electrical measurement devices (watt-
hour meters) used during all tests shall be accurate to within +-0.5
percent of indicated value.
4.1.3 Test tolerances. All steady-state wet-and dry-coil performance
tests shall be performed within the applicable operating and test
condition tolerances specified in Section 11.6 and Table III of ASHRAE
Standard 37-78.
4.1.3.1 The indoor and outdoor average dry-bulb temperature for the
cyclic dry coil test D shall both be within 1.0 [deg]F of the indoor and
outdoor average dry bulb temperature for the steady-state dry coil test
C, respectively.
4.1.3.2 The test condition and test operating tolerances for
conducting test D are stated in 6.1.1 of this Appendix. Variation in the
test conditions greater than the tolerances prescribed in 6.1.1 of this
Appendix shall invalidate the test. It is suggested that an electric
resistance heater having a heating capacity approximately equal to the
sum of the cooling capacity and compressor and condenser fan power
should be installed in the outdoor test room and cycled ``off'' and
``on'' as the unit cycles ``on'' and ``off'' respectively to improve
control in the outdoor test room. Similarly, an electric resistance
heater having a heating capacity approximately equal to the cooling
capacity of the unit could be installed in the indoor test room, and
cycled ``on'' and ``off'' as the test unit cycles ``on'' and ``off'' to
improve indoor room control.
4.2 Testing procedures for air source heating only units.
4.2.1 Test operating procedures. All High Temperature Tests, the
Cyclic Test, the Frost Accumulation Test, and the low Temperature test
shall have the performance evaluated by the Air-Enthalpy Method on the
indoor side. In addition, the High Temperature Test and the Low
Temperature Test shall have a simultaneous test method (as described in
4.1) used as a check. The values calculated from the two methods must
agree within 6 percent in order to constitute a valid test. Only the
results from the Air-Enthalpy Method on the indoor side shall be used in
the calulations in section 5.2.
4.2.1.1 Test procedure for high temperature test. When the outdoor
Air-Enthalpy Method is used, the outdoor chamber must not interfere with
the normal air circulating pattern during the preliminary test. It is
necessary to determine and adjust for system resistance when the outdoor
air measuring apparatus is attached to the outdoor portion of the unit.
The test room apparatus and test units must be operated for at least one
hour with at least \1/2\ hour at equilibrium and at the specified test
conditions prior to starting the test. The High Temperature Test shall
then be conducted for a minimum of \1/2\ hour with intermittent data
being recorded at 10-minute intervals. For all units, especially those
having controls which periodically cause the unit to operate in defrost
mode, attention should be given to prevent defrost during the High
Temperature Test. Units which have undergone a defrost should operate in
the heating mode for at least 10-minutes after defrost termination prior
to the start of the test. When the outdoor Air-Enthalpy Method is used
as a second test then a preliminary test must be conducted for a minimum
of 30 minutes with 4 or more sets of data recorded at 10 minute
intervals, all remaining requirements of Section 3.6.1 in the ASHRAE
Standard 37-78 shall then apply in conducting the preliminary test for
the outdoor air enthalpy method. For some units, at the ambient
condition of the test, frost may accumulate on the outdoor coil. If the
supply air temperature or the difference between the supply air
temperature and the indoor air entering temperature has decreased by
more than 1.5 [deg]F at the end of the test, the unit shall be defrosted
and the test restarted. Only the results of this second High Temperature
Test shall be used in the heating seasonal performance calculation in
section 5.2. Prior to beginning the High Temperature Test, a unit shall
operate in the heating mode for at least 10 minutes after defrost
termination to establish equilibrium conditions for the unit and the
room reconditioning apparatus. The High Temperature Test may only begin
when the test unit and room conditions are within the test condition
tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1 of this Appendix.
4.2.1.2 Test procedures for the cyclic test. The cyclic test shall
follow the High Temperature Test and by cycled ``on'' and ``off'' as
specified in 3.2.1.2 until steadily repeating ambient conditions are
achieved for both the indoor and outdoor test chambers, but for not less
than 2 complete ``off''/``on'' cycles. Without a break in the cycling
pattern, the unit shall be operated through an additional ``off''/``on''
cycle, during which the required test data shall be recorded. During the
last cycle, which is referred to as the test cycle, the indoor and
outdoor test room ambient conditions shall remain within the tolerance
specified in section 6.2.2. of this Appendix. If, prior to the High
Temperature Test, the unit underwent a defrost cycle to rid the outdoor
coil of any accumulated frost, then prior to cycling the unit ``off''
and ``on'' it should be made to undergo a defrost. After defrost is
completed and before starting the cycling process, the unit shall be
operated continuously in the heating mode for a least 10 minutes to
assure that equilibrium conditions have again been established for the
unit and the room conditioning apparatus. Cycling
[[Page 215]]
the unit may begin when the test unit and room conditions are within the
High Temperature Test condition tolerances specified in section 6.2.1 of
this Appendix. Attention should be given to prevent defrost after the
cycling process has begun.
The cycle times for variable-speed units is the same as the cyclic
time in the cooling mode as specified in section 4.1.1.2 of this
Appendix. Cyclic tests of split-type ductless units will be conducted
without dampers, and the data cycle shall be preceded by a minimum of
two cycles in which the indoor fan cycles on and off with the
compressor. During the data cycle for the split type ductless units, the
indoor fan will operate three minutes prior to compressor ``cut-on'' and
remain on for three minutes after compressor ``cut-off''. The
integration time for capacity and power will be from compressor ``cut-
on'' time to indoor fan ``cut-off'' time. The fan power for the three
minutes after compressor ``cut-off'' shall be subtracted from the
integrated heating capacity. For split-type ductless systems which turn
the indoor fan off during defrost, the indoor supply duct shall not be
blocked.
4.2.1.3 Test procedures for the frost accumulation test. The defrost
controls shall be set at the normal settings which most typify those
encountered in Region IV as described in section 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 of this
Appendix. The test room reconditioning equipment and the unit under test
shall be operated for at least \1/2\ hour prior to the start of a
``preliminary'' test period. The preliminary test period and the test
period itself are to be conducted within the test tolerances given in
section 4.2.3.3 of this Appendix. In some cases, the preliminary defrost
cycle may be manually induced, however, it is important that the
normally operating controls govern the defrost termination in all cases.
For units containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrost
at intervals less than one hour when the unit is operating at the
required test conditions, the preliminary test period shall start at the
termination of a defrost cycle which automatically occurs and shall end
at the termination of the next automatically occurring defrost cycle.
For units containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrost
at intervals exceeding one hour when operating at the required test
condition, the preliminary test period consists of ``heating-only''
preliminary operation for at least one hour, after which a defrost may
be manually or automatically induced. The test period then begins at the
termination of this defrost cycle and ends at the termination of the
next automatically occurring defrost cycle. If the unit has not
undergone a defrost after 12 hours, then the tests shall be concluded
and the results calculated for this 12-hour period. For units which turn
the indoor fan off during defrost the indoor supply duct shall be
blocked during all defrost cycles to prevent natural or forced
convection through the indoor unit. During defrost, resistance heaters
normally installed with the unit shall be prevented from operating.
For units with variable-speed compressors, the frost accumulation
test at the intermediate speed shall be conducted such that the unit
will operate at a constant, intermediate compressor speed (k=i) as
determined in section 4.1.1.4 of this Appendix. The following two
equations may be used in lieu of the frost accumulation test for
variable-speed.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.039
4.2.1.4 Test procedures for the low temperature test. Where
applicable, the High Temperature Test preparation and performance
requirements shall also be used in the Low Temperature Test. The test
room reconditioning equipment shall first be operated in a steady-state
manner for at least one-half hour at equilibrium and at the specified
test conditions. The unit shall then undergo a defrost, either automatic
or manually induced. It is important that the unit terminate the defrost
sequence by the action of its own defrost controls. The defrost controls
are to remain at the same setting as specified in 4.2.1.3. At a time no
earlier than 10 minutes after defrost termination, the test shall start.
Test duration is one-half hour. For all units, defrost should be
prevented during the one-half hour test period.
4.2.2 Test instrumentation.
4.2.2.1 Test instrumentation for the high temperature test. The
indoor air flow rate shall be determined as described in Section 7.1
through 7.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78. This requires the construction of
an air receiving chamber and discharge chamber separated by
[[Page 216]]
partition in which one or more nozzles are located. The receiving
chamber is connected to the indoor air discharge side of the test
specimen through a short plenum. The exhaust side of the air flow rate
measuring device contains an exhaust fan with some means to vary its
capacity to obtain the desired external resistance to air flow rate. The
exhaust side is then left open to the test room or is ducted through a
conditioning apparatus and then back to the test specimen inlet. The
static pressure across the nozzles, the velocity pressure, and the
static pressure measurements at the nozzle throat shall be measured with
manometers which will result in errors which are no greater than +-1.0
percent of indicated value and having minimum scale divisions not
exceeding 2.0 percent of the reading. Static pressure and temperature
measurements must be taken at the nozzle throat in order to obtain
density of the air. The areas of the nozzles shall be determined by
measuring their diameter with an error no greater than +-0.2 percent in
four places approximately 45 degrees apart around the nozzle in each of
two places through the nozzle throat, one at the outlets and the others
in the straight section near the radius. The energy usage of the
compressor, indoor and outdoor fan, and all other equipment components
shall be measured with a watt-hour meter which is accurate to within +-
0.5 percent of the quantity measured. Measurements of the air
temperature entering and leaving the indoor coil or the difference
between these two shall be made in accordance with the requirements of
ASHRAE Standard 41 part 1. These temperatures shall be continuously
recorded with instrumentation having a total system accuracy within +-
0.3 [deg]F of indicated value and a response time of 2.5 seconds or
less. Temperature measurements are to be made upstream of the static
pressure tap on the inlet and downstream of the static pressure taps on
the outlet. The indoor and outdoor dry-bulb temperatures shall be
continuously recorded with instrumentation which will result in an error
no greater than +-0.3 [deg]F of indicated value. The outdoor wet-bulb
temperature shall be continuously recorded. Static pressure measurements
in the ducts and across the unit shall be made in accordance with
Section 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-78 using equipment which will result in
an error no greater than +-0.01 inch of water. Static pressure
measurements shall be made and recorded at 5 minute intervals. All other
data not continuously recorded shall be recorded at 10 minute intervals.
4.2.2.2 Test instrumentation for the cycling test. The air flow rate
during the on-period of the Cyclic Test shall be the same agreed within
+-1. percent as the air flow rate measured during the previously
conducted High Temperature Test. All other instrumentation requirements
are identical to 4.2.2.1 of this Appendix.
4.2.2.3 Test instrumentation for the frost accumulation test. The
air flow rate for the Frost Accumulation Test shall be the same as
described in 4.2.2.1. The indoor-side dry-bulb temperature and outdoor-
side dry-bulb temperature shall be continuously recorded with
instrumentation having a total system accuracy within +-0.3 [deg]F of
indicated value. The outdoor dew point temperature shall be determined
with an error no greater than +-0.5 [deg]F of indicated value using
continuously recording instrumentation. All other data shall be recorded
at 10 minute intervals during the heating cycle. Defrost initiation,
termination and complete test cycle time (from defrost termination to
defrost termination) shall be recorded. Defrost initiation is defined as
the actuation (either automatically or manually) of the controls
normally installed with the unit which cause it to alter its normal
heating operation in order to eliminate possible accumulations of frost
on the outdoor coil. Defrost termination occurs when the controls
normally within the unit are actuated to change from defrost operation
to normal heating operation. Provisions should be made so that
instrumentation in capable of recording the cooling done during defrost
as well as the total electrical energy usage during defrost. These data
and the continuously recorded data need be the only data obtained during
defrost.
4.2.2.4 Test instrumentation for the low temperature test.
Instrumentation for the Low Temperature Test is identical to that of the
High Temperature Test described in section 4.2.2.1 of this Appendix.
4.2.3 Test tolerances.
4.2.3.1 Test tolerances for the high temperature test. All tests
shall be conducted within the tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1.
Variation greater than those given shall invalidate the test. The
heating capacity results by the indoor Air Enthalpy Method shall agree
within 6 percent of the value determined by any other simultaneously
conducted capacity test in order for the test to be valid.
4.2.3.2 Test tolerances for the cyclic test. The test condition
tolerances and test operating tolerances for the on-period portion of
the test cycle are specified in Section 6.2.2. Variation exceeding any
specified test tolerance shall invalidate the test results.
4.2.3.3 Test tolerances for the frost accumulation test. Test
condition and test operating tolerances for Frost Accumulation Tests are
specified in Section 6.2.3. Test operating tolerances during heating
applies when the unit is in the heating mode, except for the first 5
minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle. Test operating
tolerance during defrost applies during a defrost cycle and during the
first 5 minutes after defrost termination when the unit is operating in
the
[[Page 217]]
heating mode. In determining whether the test condition tolerances are
met, only the heating portion of the test period shall be used in
calculating the average values. Variations exceeding the tolerances
presented in Section 6.2.3 shall invalidate the test.
4.2.3.4 Test tolerances for the low temperature test. During the
test period for the Low Temperature Test, the operating conditions shall
be within the tolerances specified in Section 6.2.1 of this Appendix.
4.3 Testing procedures for air source units which provide both
heating and cooling. The testing procedures for units which provide both
heating and cooling shall be the same as those specified in Sections 4.1
and 4.2 of this Appendix. Also during the off-period of the dry-coil
cooling test (test D), the switch-over valve shall remain in the cooling
mode, unless the controls normally supplied with the unit are designed
to reverse it, in which case the controls shall operate the valve.
During the off-period of the cyclic heating test at 47 [deg] F, the
switch-over valve shall remain in the heating mode, unless the controls
normally supplied with the unit are designed to reverse it, in which
case the controls shall operate the valve.
5.0 Calculations for performance factors.
5.1 Calculations of seasonal energy efficiency ratios (SEER) in air-
source units.
The testing data and results required to calculate the seasonal
energy efficiency ratio (SEER) in Btu's per watt-hour shall include the
following:
(i) Cooling capacities (Btu/hr) from tests A and B and, if
applicable, the cooling capacity (Btu/hr) from test C and the total
cooling done from test D (Btu's).
Qss k (95F)
Qss k (82F)
Qss, dry
Qcyc, dry
(ii) Electrical power input to all components and controls (watts)
from tests A, B, and if applicable the electrical power input to all
components and controls (watts) from test C and the electrical usage
(watt-hour) from test D.
Ess k (95F)
Ess k (82F)
Ess k, dry
Ecyc, dry
(iii) Indoor air flow rate (SCFM) and external resistance to indoor
air flow (inches of water).
(iv) Air temperature ([deg]F)
Outdoor dry bulb
Outdoor wet bulb
Indoor dry bulb
Indoor wet bulb
Where the cooling capacities Qss k (95F), from test A,
Qss k (82), from test B, and Qss, dry, from test
C, are calculated using the equations specified in section 3.7 of ASHRAE
Standard 37-78. The total cooling done, Qcyc, dry from test
D, is calculated using equation (1) below.
Units which do not have indoor air circulating fans furnished as
part of the model shall have their measured total cooling capacities
adjusted by subtracting 1250 Btu/hr per 1,000 CFM of measured indoor air
flow and adding to the total steady-state electrical power input 365
watts per 1,000 CFM of measured indoor air flow.
Energy efficiency ratios from tests A, B, and C, EERA,
EERB, EERss, dry respectively, are each calculated
as the ratio of the total cooling capacity in Btu/hr to the total
electrical power input in watts.
Units which do not have indoor air circulating fans furnished as
part of the model shall adjust their total cooling done and energy used
in one complete cycle for the effect of circulating indoor air equipment
power. The value to be used for the circulating indoor air equipment
power shall be 1250 Btu/hr per 1,000 CFM of circulating indoor air. The
energy usage required in one complete cycle required for indoor air
circulation is the product of the circulating indoor air equipment power
and the duration of time in one cycle that the circulating indoor air
equipment is on. The total cooling done shall then be the measured
cooling in one complete cycle minus the energy usage required for indoor
air circulation in one complete cycle. The total electrical energy usage
shall be the sum of the energy usage required for indoor air circulation
in one complete cycle and the energy used by the remaining equipment
components (compressor(s), outdoor fan, crankcase heater,
transformer(s), etc.) in one complete test cycle.
Energy efficiency ratio from tests D, EERcyc dry is
calculated as the ratio of the total cooling done in Btu's to the total
electrical energy usage in watt-hours.
[[Page 218]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.040
[[Page 219]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.041
[[Page 220]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.042
[[Page 221]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.043
[[Page 222]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.044
[[Page 223]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.045
[[Page 224]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.046
[[Page 225]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.047
[[Page 226]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.048
[[Page 227]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.049
[[Page 228]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.050
[[Page 229]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.051
[[Page 230]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.052
6.0 Reference material.
6.1 Cooling reference material.
6.1.1 Test operating and test condition tolerance for cyclic dry-
coil tests.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
operating condition
Readings, remarks tolerance tolerance
\1\ \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outdoor dry-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit: 2.0 0.5
Entering.......................................
Indoor dry-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit: 2.0 0.5
Entering.......................................
Indoor wet-bulb air temperature, Fahrenheit: (\3\) (\3\)
Entering.......................................
After the first 30 sec after compressor startup:
External resistance to airflow, inches water.. 0.05 0.02
Nozzle pressure drops, percent of reading..... 2.0 ..........
[[Page 231]]
Electrical voltage inputs to the test unit, 2.0 ..........
percent......................................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Total observed range.
\2\ Variation of average from specified test condition.
\3\ Shall at no time exceed that value of the wet-bulb temperature which
results in the production of condensate by the indoor coil at the dry-
bulb temperature existing for the air entering the indoor portion of
the unit.
6.1.2 Distribution of fractional hours in temperature bins to be
used for calculation of the SEER for 2-speed compressor and 2-compressor
units.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bin Representative Fraction of
temperature temperature total
Bin No. j: range bin for temperature
(degrees (degrees bin hours
Fahrenheit) Fahrenheit) nj/N
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1............................. 65-69 67 .214
2............................. 70-74 72 .231
3............................. 75-79 77 .216
4............................. 80-84 82 .161
5............................. 85-89 87 .104
6............................. 90-94 92 .052
7............................. 95-99 97 .018
8............................. 100-104 102 .004
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 232]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.053
6.2 Heating reference material.
6.2.1 Test operating and test condition tolerance for Steady-State
High Temperature Test [at 47 [deg]F (8.3 [deg]C) or 62 [deg]F (16.7
[deg]C)] and Low Temperature Test [at 17 [deg]F (-8.3 [deg]C)].
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
operating condition
\1\ \2\
tolerance tolerance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving..................................... 2.0 ...........
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 1.0 ...........
Leaving..................................... 1.0 ...........
[[Page 233]]
Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving..................................... 2.0 ...........
Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 1.0 0.3
Leaving..................................... 1.0 ...........
External resistance to air flow, inches of .05 .02
water........................................
Electrical voltage, percent................... 2.0 ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
variation is the specified percentage of the average value.
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
condition.
6.2.2 Test operating and test condition tolerances for the on-period
portion of cyclic performance tests.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
operating condition
tolerances tolerance
\1\ \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving..................................... ........... ...........
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 1.0 ...........
Leaving..................................... ........... ...........
Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving..................................... ........... ...........
Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering.................................... 2.0 1.0
Leaving..................................... ........... ...........
External resistance to air-flow, inches of .05 .02
water........................................
Electrical voltage, percent................... 2.0 ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
variation is the specified percentage of the average value. (Applies
after the first 30 seconds after compressor start-up.)
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
condition.
6.2.3 Test operating and test tolerances for frost accumulation
tests.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Testing operating
tolerance \1\ Test condition
---------------------- tolerance \2\
During During (heating
heating defrost portion only)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering........................ 2.0 \3\ 4.0 0.5
Leaving......................... ......... ......... ..............
Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering........................ 1.0 ......... ..............
Leaving......................... ......... ......... ..............
Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering........................ 2.0 10.0 1.0
Leaving......................... ......... ......... ..............
Outdoor dew-point, [deg]F:
Entering........................ 1.5 ......... 0.7
Leaving......................... ......... ......... ..............
External resistance to air-flow, .05 ......... .02
inches of water..................
Electrical voltage, percent....... 2.0 ......... ..............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Test operating tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of any
measurement. When expressed as a percentage, the maximum allowable
variation is the specified percentage of the average value. Test
Operating Tolerance During Heating applies when the heat pump is in
the heating mode, except for the first 5 minutes after termination of
a defrost cycle. Test Operating Tolerance During Defrost applies
during a defrost cycle and during the first 5 minutes after the
termination of a defrost cycle when the heat pump is operating in the
heating mode.
\2\ Test condition tolerance is the maximum permissible variation of the
average value of the measurement from the standard or desired test
condition. Test Condition Tolerance applies only when the heat pump is
operating in the heating mode.
\3\ Not applicable during defrost if the indoor fan is off.
6.2.4 Distribution of fractional hours in temperature bins, heating
load hours and outdoor design temperature for the different climatic
regions.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fractional hours Region
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bin No. Tj ([deg]F) I II III IV V VI
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Heating Load Hours, HLH
............. 750 1,250 1,750 2,250 2,750 \1\ 2,750
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Outdoor Design Temperature, TOD, for the region
............. 37 27 17 5 -10 30
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
j=1 62 .291 .215 .153 .132 .106 .113
2 57 .239 .189 .142 .111 .092 .206
3 52 .194 .163 .138 .103 .086 .215
4 47 .129 .143 .137 .093 .076 .204
5 42 .081 .112 .135 .100 .078 .141
6 37 .041 .088 .118 .109 .087 .076
7 32 .019 .056 .092 .126 .102 .034
8 27 .005 .024 .047 .087 .094 .008
9 22 .001 .008 .021 .055 .074 .003
10 17 0 .002 .009 .036 .055 0
11 12 0 0 .005 .026 .047 0
12 7 0 0 .002 .013 .038 0
13 2 0 0 .001 .006 .029 0
14 -3 0 0 0 .002 .018 0
[[Page 234]]
15 -8 0 0 0 .001 .010 0
16 -13 0 0 0 0 .005 0
17 -18 0 0 0 0 .002 0
18 -23 0 0 0 0 .001 0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Pacific Coast Region.
[[Page 235]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.054
6.2.6 Standard Design Heating Requirements (Btu/hr)
5,000 25,000 50,000 90,000
10,000 30,000 60,000 100,000
15,000 35,000 70,000 110,000
20,000 40,000 80,000 130,000
6.3 Representative Cooling Load Hours (CLHR) for Each
Heating Load Hours Region.
[[Page 236]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Region CLHR HLHR
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I............................................. 2,400 750
II............................................ 1,800 1,250
III........................................... 1,200 1,750
IV............................................ 800 2,250
V............................................. 400 2,750
VI............................................ 200 2,750
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.4 Ground Water Temperature Map (Reserved).
[44 FR 76707, Dec. 27, 1979, as amended at 54 FR 6076, Feb. 7, 1989]
Appendix N to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers
1.0 Scope. The scope of this appendix is as specified in section 2.0
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
2.0 Definitions. Definitions include the definitions specified in
section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the following additional
and modified definitions:
2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 means the test standard published
in 1993 by ASHRAE, approved by the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) on October 4, 1993, and entitled ``Method of Testing for Annual
Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and
Boilers'' (with errata of October 24, 1996).
2.2 ASHRAE means the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
2.3 Thermal stack damper means a type of stack damper which is
dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of
thermal energy of the stack gases to open the damper.
2.4 Isolated combustion system. The definition of isolation
combustion system in section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is
incorporated with the addition of the following: ``The unit is installed
in an un-conditioned indoor space isolated from the heated space.''
3.0 Classifications. Classifications are as specified in section 4
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
4.0 Requirements. Requirements are as specified in section 5 of
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
5.0 Instruments. Instruments must be as specified in section 6 of
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
6.0 Apparatus. The apparatus used in conjunction with the furnace or
boiler during the testing shall be as specified in section 7 of ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for the second paragraph of section
7.2.2.2 and except for section 7.2.2.5, and as specified in section 6.1
of this appendix.
6.1 Downflow furnaces. Install the internal section of vent pipe the
same size as the flue collar for connecting the flue collar to the top
of the unit, if not supplied by the manufacturer. Do not insulate the
internal vent pipe during the jacket loss test (if conducted) described
in section 8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or the steady-state test
described in section 9.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993. Do not
insulate the internal vent pipe before the cool-down and heat-up tests
described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
103-1993. If the vent pipe is surrounded by a metal jacket, do not
insulate the metal jacket. Install a 5-ft test stack of the same cross
sectional area or perimeter as the vent pipe above the top of the
furnace. Tape or seal around the junction connecting the vent pipe and
the 5-ft test stack. Insulate the 5-ft test stack with insulation having
an R-value not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (See
Figure 3-E of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
7.0 Testing conditions. The testing conditions shall be as specified
in section 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 with errata of October 24,
1996, except for section 8.6.1.1; and as specified in section 7.1 of
this appendix.
7.1 Measurement of jacket surface temperature. The jacket of the
furnace or boiler shall be subdivided into 6-inch squares when
practical, and otherwise into 36-square-inch regions comprising 4 in. x
9 in. or 3 in. x 12 in. sections, and the surface temperature at the
center of each square or section shall be determined with a surface
thermocouple. The 36-square-inch areas shall be recorded in groups where
the temperature differential of the 36-square-inch area is less than 10
[deg]F for temperature up to 100 [deg]F above room temperature and less
than 20 [deg]F for temperature more than 100 [deg]F above room
temperature. For forced air central furnaces, the circulating air blower
compartment is considered as part of the duct system and no surface
temperature measurement of the blower compartment needs to be recorded
for the purpose of this test. For downflow furnaces, measure all cabinet
surface temperatures of the heat exchanger and combustion section,
including the bottom around the outlet duct, and the burner door, using
the 36 square-inch thermocouple grid. The cabinet surface temperatures
around the blower section do not need to be measured (See figure 3-E of
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
8.0 Test procedure. Testing and measurements shall be as specified
in section 9 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for sections
9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, and section 9.7.1. ; and as
specified in sections 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5, of this appendix.
8.1 Input to interrupted ignition device. For burners equipped with
an interrupted ignition device, record the nameplate electric power used
by the ignition device, PEIG, or use PEIG=0.4 kW
if no nameplate power input
[[Page 237]]
is provided. Record the nameplate ignition device on-time interval,
tIG, or measure the on-time period at the beginning of the
test at the time the burner is turned on with a stop watch, if no
nameplate value is given. Set tIG=0 and PEIG=0 if
the device on-time is less than or equal to 5 seconds after the burner
is on.
8.2 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces
without stack dampers cool-down test. Turn off the main burner after
steady-state testing is completed, and measure the flue gas temperature
by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/
ASHRAE 103-1993 at 1.5 minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and 9
minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the burner shuts off.
An integral draft diverter shall remain blocked and insulated, and the
stack restriction shall remain in place. On atmospheric systems with an
integral draft diverter or draft hood, equipped with either an
electromechanical inlet damper or an electro-mechanical flue damper that
closes within 10 seconds after the burner shuts off to restrict the flow
through the heat exchanger in the off-cycle, bypass or adjust the
control for the electromechanical damper so that the damper remains open
during the cool-down test. For furnaces that employ post purge, measure
the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. The time from
burner OFF to combustion blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be
recorded as tp. For the case where tp is intended
to be greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180
seconds and use that value for tp. Measure the flue gas
temperature by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6
of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 at the end of post-purge period, tp
(TF,OFF(tp)), and at the time (1.5 +
tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (9.0 +
tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main
burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tp is less than or
equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge and
tp shall be set equal to 0.
8.3 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces
without stack dampers with adjustable fan control--cool-down test. For a
furnace with adjustable fan control, this time delay will be 3.0 minutes
for non-condensing furnaces or 1.5 minutes for condensing furnaces or
until the supply air temperature drops to a value of 40 [deg]F above the
inlet air temperature, whichever results in the longest fan on-time. For
a furnace without adjustable fan control or with the type of adjustable
fan control whose range of adjustment does not allow for the delay time
specified above, the control shall be bypassed and the fan manually
controlled to give the delay times specified above. For a furnace which
employs a single motor to drive the power burner and the indoor air
circulating blower, the power burner and indoor air circulating blower
shall be stopped together.
8.4 Gas-and oil-fueled boilers without stack dampers cool-down test.
After steady-state testing has been completed, turn the main burner(s)
OFF and measure the flue gas temperature at 3.75
(TF,OFF(t3)) and 22.5
(TF,OFF(t4)) minutes after the burner shut off,
using the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-
1993. During this off-period, for units that do not have pump delay
after shutoff, no water shall be allowed to circulate through the hot
water boilers. For units that have pump delay on shutoff, except those
having pump controls sensing water temperature, the pump shall be
stopped by the unit control and the time t+, between burner
shutoff and pump shutoff shall be measured within one-second accuracy.
For units having pump delay controls that sense water temperature, the
pump shall be operated for 15 minutes and t+ shall be 15
minutes. While the pump is operating, the inlet water temperature and
flow rate shall be maintained at the same values as used during the
steady-state test as specified in sections 9.1 and 8.4.2.3 of ANSI/
ASHRAE 103-1993.
For boilers that employ post purge, measure the length of the post-
purge period with a stopwatch. The time from burner OFF to combustion
blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be recorded as
tP. For the case where tP is intended to be
greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180 seconds and
use that value for tP. Measure the flue gas temperature by
means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE
103-1993 at the end of the post purge period
tP(TF,OFF(tP)) and at the time (3.75 +
tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (22.5 +
tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main
burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tP is less
or equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge
and tP shall be set to equal 0.
8.5 Direct measurement of off-cycle losses testing method.
[Reserved.]
9.0 Nomenclature. Nomenclature shall include the nomenclature
specified in section 10 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the
following additional variables:
Effmotor=Efficiency of power burner motor
PEIG=Electrical power to the interrupted ignition device, kW
RT,a=RT,F if flue gas is measured
=RT,S if stack gas is measured
RT,F=Ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to stoichiometric
air mass flow rate
RT,S=Ratio of the sum of combustion air and relief air mass
flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate
tIG=Electrical interrupted ignition device on-time, min.
Ta,SS,X=TF,SS,X if flue gas temperature is
measured, [deg]F
=TS,SS,X if stack gas temperature is measured, [deg]F
[[Page 238]]
yIG=ratio of electrical interrupted ignition device on-time
to average burner on-time
yP=ratio of power burner combustion blower on-time to average
burner on-time
10.0 Calculation of derived results from test measurements.
Calculations shall be as specified in section 11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
103-1993 and the October 24, 1996, Errata Sheet for ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993, except for appendices B and C; and as specified in sections 10.1
through 10.8 and Figure 1 of this appendix.
10.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. The annual fuel utilization
efficiency (AFUE) is as defined in sections 11.2.12 (non-condensing
systems), 11.3.12 (condensing systems), 11.4.12 (non-condensing
modulating systems) and 11.5.12 (condensing modulating systems) of ANSI/
ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, except for the definition for the term
EffyHS in the defining equation for AFUE. EffyHS
is defined as:
EffyHS=heating seasonal efficiency as defined in sections
11.2.11 (non-condensing systems), 11.3.11 (condensing systems), 11.4.11
(non-condensing modulating systems) and 11.5.11 (condensing modulating
systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and is based on the
assumptions that all weatherized warm air furnaces or boilers are
located out-of-doors, that warm air furnaces which are not weatherized
are installed as isolated combustion systems, and that boilers which are
not weatherized are installed indoors.
10.2 National average burner operating hours, average annual fuel
energy consumption and average annual auxiliary electrical energy
consumption for gas or oil furnaces and boilers.
10.2.1 National average number of burner operating hours. For
furnaces and boilers equipped with single stage controls, the national
average number of burner operating hours is defined as:
BOHSS=2,080 (0.77) A DHR-2,080 B
where:
2,080=national average heating load hours
0.77=adjustment factor to adjust the calculated design heating
requirement and heating load hours to the actual heating load
experienced by the heating system
DHR=typical design heating requirements as listed in Table 8 (in unit of
kBtu/h) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, using the proper value of
QOUT defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
A=100,000 /
[341,300(yPPE+yIGPEIG+yBE)+(QIN
-QP)EffyHS], for forced draft unit, indoors
=100,000 / [341,300(yPPE
Effmotor+yIGPEIG+y BE)+(QIN-
QP)EffyHS], for forced draft unit, ICS,
=100,000 / [341,300(yPPE(1-
Effmotor)+yIGPEIG+y
BE)+(QIN-QP)EffyHS], for induced draft
unit, indoors, and
=100,000 /
[341,300(yIGPEIG+yBE)+(QIN-
QP)EffyHS], for induced draft unit, ICS
B=2 QP(EffyHS)(A) / 100,000
where:
Effmotor=Power burner motor efficiency provided by
manufacturer,
=0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by
manufacturer.
100,000=factor that accounts for percent and kBtu
PE=burner electrical power input at full-load steady-state operation,
including electrical ignition device if energized, as defined in 9.1.2.2
of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
yP=ratio of induced or forced draft blower on-time to average
burner on-time, as follows:
1 for units without post purge;
1+(tP/3.87) for single stage furnaces with post purge;
1+(tP/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces with
post purge;
1+(tP/9.68) for single stage boilers with post purge; or
1+(tP/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers with
post purge.
PEIG=electrical input rate to the interrupted ignition device
on burner (if employed), as defined in 8.1 of this appendix
yIG=ratio of burner interrupted ignition device on-time to
average burner on-time, as follows:
0 for burners not equipped with interrupted ignition device;
(tIG/3.87) for single stage furnaces;
(tIG/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces;
(tIG/9.68) for single stage boilers; or
(tIG/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers.
tIG=on-time of the burner interrupted ignition device, as
defined in 8.1 of this appendix
tP=post purge time as defined in 8.2 (furnace) or 8.4
(boiler) of this appendix
=0 if tP is equal to or less than 30 second.
y=ratio of blower or pump on-time to average burner on-time, as follows:
1 for furnaces without fan delay;
1 for boilers without a pump delay;
1+(t+--t-)/3.87 for single stage furnaces with
fan delay;
1+(t+--t-)/10 for two-stage and step
modulating furnaces with fan delay;
1+(t+/9.68) for single stage boilers with pump delay; or
1+(t+/15) for two stage and step modulating boilers with
pump delay.
BE=circulating air fan or water pump electrical energy input rate at
full load steady-state operation, as defined in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
103-1993
QIN=as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
[[Page 239]]
EffyHS=as defined in 11.2.11 (non-condensing systems) or
11.3.11.3 (condensing systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
percent, and calculated on the basis of:
ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.
2=ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the
average heating load hours
t+=as defined in 9.5.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or
8.4 of this appendix
t-=as defined in 9.6.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.2.1.1 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step
modulating controls the average annual energy used during the heating
season, EM, is defined as:
EM=(QIN-QP) BOHSS+(8,760-
4,600)QP
where:
QIN=as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
BOHSS=as defined in section 10.2.1 of this appendix, in which
the weighted EffyHS as defined in 11.4.11.3 or 11.5.11.3 of
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is used for calculating the values of A
and B, the term DHR is based on the value of QOUT defined in
11.4.8.1.1 or 11.5.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, and the term
(yPPE+yIGPEIG+yBE) in the factor A is
increased by the factor R, which is defined as:
R=2.3 for two stage controls
=2.3 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-
maximum output is greater than or equal to 0.5
=3.0 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-
maximum output is less than 0.5
A=100,000/[341,300(yPPE+yIGPEIG+y BE)
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for forced draft
unit, indoors
=100,000/[341,300(yPPE
Effmotor+yIGPEIG+y BE)
R+(QIN-QP)EffyHS], for forced draft
unit, ICS,
=100,000/[341,300(yPPE(1-
Effmotor)+yIGPEIG+y BE)
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for induced draft
unit, indoors, and
=100,000/[341,300(yIGPEIG+y BE)
R+(QIN-QP) EffyHS], for induced draft
unit, ICS
where:
Effmotor=Power burner motor efficiency provided by
manufacturer,
=0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if none provided
by manufacturer.
EffyHS=as defined in 11.4.11.3 or 11.5.11.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, and calculated on the basis of:
--ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces
--indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers
--outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are
weatherized
8,760=total number of hours per year
4,600=as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.2.1.2 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage or step
modulating controls the national average number of burner operating
hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as:
BOHR=XREM/QIN,R
where:
XR=as defined in 11.4.8.7 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN,R=as defined in 11.4.8.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993
10.2.1.3 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two stage controls
the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum
operating mode (BOHH) is defined as:
BOHH=XHEM/QIN
where:
XH=as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN=as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.2.1.4 For furnaces and boilers equipped with step modulating
controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the
modulating operating mode (BOHM) is defined as:
BOHM=XHEM/QIN,M
where:
XH=as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM=as defined in section 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
QIN,M=QOUT,M/(EffySS,M/100)
QOUT,M=as defined in 11.4.8.10 or 11.5.8.10 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, as appropriate
EffySS,M=as defined in 11.4.8.8 or 11.5.8.8 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, as appropriate, in percent
100=factor that accounts for percent
10.2.2 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled
furnaces or boilers. For furnaces or boilers equipped with single stage
controls the average annual fuel energy consumption (EF) is
expressed in Btu per year and defined as:
EF=BOHSS(QIN-QP)+8,760
QP
[[Page 240]]
where:
BOHSS=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QIN=as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.2.2.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with either two stage or
step modulating controls EF is defined as:
EF=EM + 4,600QP
where:
EM=as defined in 10.2.1.1 of this appendix
4,600=as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.2.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for
gas or oil fueled furnaces or boilers. For furnaces or boilers equipped
with single stage controls the average annual auxiliary electrical
consumption (EAE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined
as:
EAE=BOHSS(yPPE
+yIGPEIG+yBE)
where:
BOHSS=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PE=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
BE=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.2.3.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with two stage controls
EAE is defined as:
EAE=BOHR(yPPER+yIG
PEIG+yBER) +
BOHH(yPPEH+yIGPEIG
+y BEH)
where:
BOHR=as defined in 10.2.1.2 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 and measured at the reduced fuel
input rate, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
BER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
BOHH=as defined in 10.2.1.3 of this appendix
PEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the maximum fuel input rate
BEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the maximum fuel input rate
10.2.3.2 For furnaces or boilers equipped with step modulating
controls EAE is defined as:
EAE=BOHR(yP
PER+yIGPEIG+y
BER)+BOHM(yPPEH+yIG
PEIG+y BEH)
where:
BOHR=as defined in 10.2.1.2 of this appendix
yP=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
yIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
PEIG=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
y=as defined in 10.2.1. of this appendix
BER=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the reduced fuel input rate
BOHM=as defined in 10.2.1.4 of this appendix
PEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the maximum fuel input rate
BEH=as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
measured at the maximum fuel inputs rate
10.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric
furnaces or boilers. For electric furnaces and boilers the average
annual energy consumption (EE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours
and defined as:
EE=100(2,080)(0.77)DHR/(3.412 AFUE)
where:
100=to express a percent as a decimal
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
0.77=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
3.412=conversion to express energy in terms of watt-hours instead of Btu
AFUE=as defined in 11.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, in percent,
and calculated on the basis of:
ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.
10.4 Energy factor.
10.4.1 Energy factor for gas or oil furnaces and boilers. Calculate
the energy factor, EF, for gas or oil furnaces and boilers defined as,
in percent:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.038
where:
EF=average annual fuel consumption as defined in 10.2.2 of
this appendix.
EAE=as defined in 10.2.3 of this appendix.
EffyHS=Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in
11.2.11, 11.3.11, 11.4.11 or 11.5.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
in percent, and calculated on the basis of:
ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
[[Page 241]]
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.
3,412=conversion factor from kilowatt to [chyph]Btu/h
10.4.2 Energy factor for electric furnaces and boilers. The energy
factor, EF, for electric furnaces and boilers is defined as:
EF=AFUE
where:
AFUE=Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in section 10.3 of
this appendix, in percent
10.5 Average annual energy consumption for furnaces and boilers
located in a different geographic region of the United States and in
buildings with different design heating requirements.
10.5.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled
furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the
United States and in buildings with different design heating
requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers the average
annual fuel energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a
specific typical design heating requirement (EFR) is
expressed in Btu per year and defined as:
EFR=(EF-8,760 QP)(HLH/2,080)+8,760
QP
where:
EF=as defined in 10.2.2 of this appendix
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
HLH=heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from
the heating load hour map in Figure 1 of this appendix
2,080=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.5.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for
gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic
region of the United States and in buildings with different design
heating requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers the
average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for a specific
geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement
(EAER) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as:
EAER=EAE (HLH/2,080)
where:
EAE=as defined in 10.2.3 of this appendix
HLH=as defined in 10.5.1 of this appendix
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.5.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric
furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the
United States and in buildings with different design heating
requirements. For electric furnaces and boilers the average annual
electric energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a
specific typical design heating requirement (EER) is
expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as:
EER=100 (0.77) DHR HLH/(3.412 AFUE)
where:
100=as specified in 10.3 of this appendix
0.77=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
DHR=as defined in 10.2.1 of this appendix
HLH=as defined in 10.5.1 of this appendix
3.412=as specified in 10.3 of this appendix
AFUE=as defined in 10.3 of this appendix, in percent
10.6 Annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces
10.6.1 National average number of burner operating hours for mobile
home furnaces (BOHSS). BOHSS is the same as in
10.2.1 of this appendix, except that the value of EffyHS in
the calculation of the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is
calculated on the basis of a direct vent unit with system number 9 or
10.
10.6.2 Average annual fuel energy for mobile home furnaces
(EF). EF is same as in 10.2.2 of this appendix
except that the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is calculated
as specified in 10.6.1 of this appendix.
10.6.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for
mobile home furnaces (EAE). EAE is the same as in
10.2.3 of this appendix, except that the burner operating hours,
BOHSS, is calculated as specified in 10.6.1 of this appendix.
10.7 Calculation of sales weighted average annual energy consumption
for mobile home furnaces. In order to reflect the distribution of mobile
homes to geographical regions with average HLHMHF value
different from 2,080, adjust the annual fossil fuel and auxiliary
electrical energy consumption values for mobile home furnaces using the
following adjustment calculations.
10.7.1 For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual
fossil fuel energy consumption is expressed in Btu per year and defined
as:
EF,MHF=(EF-8,760 QP)HLHMHF/
2,080+8,760 QP
where:
EF=as defined in 10.6.2 of this appendix
8,760=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
QP=as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
HLHMHF=1880, sales weighted average heating load hours for
mobile home furnaces
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.7.2 For mobile home furnaces the sales weighted average annual
auxiliary electrical energy consumption is expressed in kilowatt-hours
and defined as:
EAE,MHF=EAEHLHMHF/2,080
where:
[[Page 242]]
EAE=as defined in 10.6.3 of this appendix
HLHMHF=as defined in 10.7.1 of this appendix
2,080=as specified in 10.2.1 of this appendix
10.8 Direct determination of off-cycle losses for furnaces and
boilers equipped with thermal stack dampers. [Reserved.]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.039
[62 FR 26157, May 12, 1997, as amended at 62 FR 53510, Oct. 14, 1997]
[[Page 243]]
Appendix O to Subpart B of Part 430-Uniform Test Method for Measuring
the Energy Consumption of Vented Home Heating Equipment
1.0 Definitions.
1.1 ``Air shutter'' means an adjustable device for varying the size
of the primary air inlet(s) to the combustion chamber power burner.
1.2 ``Air tube'' means a tube which carries combustion air from the
burner fan to the burner nozzle for combustion.
1.3 ``Barometic draft regulator or barometric damper'' means a
mechanical device designed to maintain a constant draft in a vented
heater.
1.4 ``Draft hood'' means an external device which performs the same
function as an integral draft diverter, as defined in section 1.17 of
this appendix.
1.5 ``Electro-mechanical stack damper'' means a type of stack damper
which is operated by electrical and/or mechanical means.
1.6 ``Excess air'' means air which passes through the combustion
chamber and the vented heater flues in excess of that which is
theoretically required for complete combustion.
1.7 ``Flue'' means a conduit between the flue outlet of a vented
heater and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric damper or
vent terminal through which the flue gases pass prior to the point of
draft relief.
1.8 ``Flue damper'' means a device installed between the furnace and
the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric draft regulator, or
vent terminal which is not equipped with a draft control device,
designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation
and to close the venting system when the appliance is in a standby
condition.
1.9 ``Flue gases'' means reaction products resulting from the
combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air, including the inerts
and any excess air.
1.10 ``Flue losses'' means the sum of sensible and latent heat
losses above room temperature of the flue gases leaving a vented heater.
1.11 ``Flue outlet'' means the opening provided in a vented heater
for the exhaust of the flue gases from the combustion chamber.
1.12 ``Heat input'' (Qin) means the rate of energy
supplied in a fuel to a vented heater operating under steady-state
conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. It includes any input energy to
the pilot light and is obtained by multiplying the measured rate of fuel
consumption by the measured higher heating value of the fuel.
1.13 ``Heating capacity'' (Qout) means the rate of useful
heat output from a vented heater, operating under steady-state
conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. For room and wall heaters, it
is obtained by multiplying the ``heat input'' (Qin) by the
steady-state efficency ([eta]ss) divided by 100. For floor
furnaces, it is obtained by multiplying (A) the ``heat input''
(Qin) by (B) the steady-state efficiency divided by 100,
minus the quantity (2.8) (Lj) divided by 100, where
Lj is the jacket loss as determined in section 3.2 of this
appendix.
1.14 ``Higher heating value'' (HHV) means the heat produced per unit
of fuel when complete combustion takes place at constant pressure and
the products of combustion are cooled to the initial temperature of the
fuel and air and when the water vapor formed during combustion is
condensed. The higher heating value is usually expressed in Btu's per
pound, Btu's per cubic foot for gaseous fuel, or Btu's per gallon for
liquid fuel.
1.15 ``Induced draft'' means a method of drawing air into the
combustion chamber by mechanical means.
1.16 ``Infiltration parameter'' means that portion of unconditioned
outside air drawn into the heated space as a consequence of loss of
conditioned air through the exhaust system of a vented heater.
1.17 ``Integral draft diverter'' means a device which is an integral
part of a vented heater, designed to: (1) Provide for the exhaust of the
products of combustion in the event of no draft, back draft, or stoppage
beyond the draft diverter, (2) prevent a back draft from entering the
vented heater, and (3) neutralize the stack action of the chimney or gas
vent upon the operation of the vented heater.
1.18 ``Manually controlled vented heaters'' means either gas or oil
fueled vented heaters equipped without thermostats.
1.19 ``Modulating control'' means either a step-modulating or two-
stage control.
1.20 ``Power burner'' means a vented heater burner which supplies
air for combustion at a pressure exceeding atmospheric pressure, or a
burner which depends on the draft induced by a fan incorporated in the
furnace for proper operation.
1.21 ``Reduced heat input rate'' means the factory adjusted lowest
reduced heat input rate for vented home heating equipment equipped with
either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats.
1.22 ``Single stage thermostat'' means a thermostat that cycles a
burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
1.23 ``Stack'' means the portion of the exhaust system downstream of
the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
1.24 ``Stack damper'' means a device installed downstream of the
integral draft diverter, draft hood, or barometric draft regulator,
designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation
and to close off the venting system when the appliance is in the standby
condition.
[[Page 244]]
1.25 ``Stack gases'' means the flue gases combined with dilution air
that enters at the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric
draft regulator.
1.26 ``Steady-state conditions for vented home heating equipment''
means equilibrium conditions as indicated by temperature variations of
not more than 5 [deg]F (2.8C) in the flue gas temperature for units
equipped with draft hoods, barometric draft regulators or direct vent
systems, in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart or not more
than 3 [deg]F (1.7C) in the stack gas temperature for units equipped
with integral draft diverters in three successive readings taken 15
minutes apart.
1.27 ``Step-modulating control'' means a control that either cycles
off and on at the low input if the heating load is light, or gradually,
increases the heat input to meet any higher heating load that cannot be
met with the low firing rate.
1.28 ``Thermal stack damper'' means a type of stack damper which is
dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of
thermal energy of the stack gases into movement of the damper plate.
1.29 ``Two stage control'' means a control that either cycles a
burner at the reduced heat input rate and off or cycles a burner at the
maximum heat input rate and off.
1.30 ``Vaporizing-type oil burner'' means a device with an oil
vaporizing bowl or other receptacle designed to operate by vaporizing
liquid fuel oil by the heat of combustion and mixing the vaporized fuel
with air.
1.31 ``Vent/air intake terminal'' means a device which is located on
the outside of a building and is connected to a vented heater by a
system of conduits. It is composed of an air intake terminal through
which the air for combustion is taken from the outside atmosphere and a
vent terminal from which flue gases are discharged.
1.32 ``Vent limiter'' means a device which limits the flow of air
from the atmospheric diaphragm chamber of a gas pressure regulator to
the atmosphere. A vent limiter may be a limiting orifice or other
limiting device.
1.33 ``Vent pipe'' means the passages and conduits in a direct vent
system through which gases pass from the combustion chamber to the
outdoor air.
2.0 Testing conditions.
2.1 Installation of test unit.
2.1.1 Vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). Install
gas fueled vented wall furnaces for test as specified in sections 2.1.3
and 2.1.4 of ANSI Z21.49-1975. Install gas fueled wall furnaces with
direct vent systems for test as described in sections 2.1.3 and 2.1.4 of
ANSI Z21.44-1973. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces as specified
in UL-730-1974, section 33. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces with
direct vent systems as specified in UL-730-1974, section 34.
2.1.2 Vented floor furnaces. Install vented floor furnaces for test
as specified in sections 35.1 through 35.5 of UL-729-1976.
2.1.3 Vented room heaters. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2.2 Flue and stack requirements.
2.2.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment employing integral
draft diverters and draft hoods (excluding direct vent systems). Attach
to, and vertically above the outlet of gas fueled vented home heating
equipment employing draft diverters or draft hoods with vertically
discharging outlets, a five (5) foot long test stack having a cross
sectional area the same size as the draft diverter outlet.
Attach to the outlet of vented heaters having a horizontally
discharging draft diverter or draft hood outlet a 90 degree elbow, and a
five (5) foot long vertical test stack. A horizontal section of pipe may
be used on the floor furnace between the diverter and the elbow if
necessary to clear any framing used in the installation. Use the minimum
length of pipe possible for this section. Use stack, elbow, and
horizontal section with same cross sectional area as the diverter
outlet.
2.2.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (excluding direct
vent systems). Use flue connections for oil fueled vented floor furnaces
as specified in section 35 of UL 729-1976, sections 34.10 through 34.18
of UL 730-1974 for oil fueled vented wall furnaces and sections 36.2 and
36.3 of UL 896-1973 for oil fueled vented room heaters.
2.2.3 Direct vent systems. Have the exhaust/air intake system
supplied by the manufacturer in place during all tests. Test units
intended for installation with a variety of vent pipe lengths with the
minimum length recommended by the manufacturer. Do not connect a heater
employing a direct vent system to a chimney or induced draft source.
Vent the gas solely on the provision for venting incorporated in the
heater and the vent/air intake system supplied with it.
2.3 Fuel supply.
2.3.1 Natural gas. For a vented heater utilizing natural gas,
maintain the gas supply to the unit under test at a normal inlet test
pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches water
column. Maintain the regulator outlet pressure at normal test pressure
approximately at that recommended by the manufacturer. Use natural gas
having a specific gravity of approximately 0.65 and a higher heating
value within +- 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot.
Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's per standard cubic
foot for the natural gas to be used in the test with an error no greater
than one percent.
2.3.2 Propane gas. For a vented heater utilizing propane gas,
maintain the gas supply to the unit under test at a normal inlet
pressure of 11 to 13 inches water column and a
[[Page 245]]
specific gravity of approximately 1.53. Maintain the regulator outlet
pressure, on units so equipped, approximately at that recommended by the
manufacturer. Use propane having a specific gravity of approximately
1.53 and a higher heating value within +- 5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per
standard cubic foot. Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's
per standard cubic foot for the propane to be used in the test with an
error no greater than one percent.
2.3.3 Other test gas. Use other test gases with characteristics as
described in section 2.2, table VII, of ANSI Standard Z21.11.1-1974. Use
gases with a measured higher heating value within +- 5 percent of the
values specified in the above ANSI standard. Determine the actual higher
heating value of the gas used in the test with an error no greater than
one percent.
2.3.4 Oil supply. For a vented heater utilizing fuel oil, use No. 1,
fuel oil (kerosene) for vaporizing-type burners and either No. 1 or No.
2 fuel oil, as specified by the manufacturer, for mechanical atomizing
type burners. Use No. 1 fuel oil with a viscosity meeting the
specifications as specified in UL-730-1974, section 36.9. Use test fuel
conforming to the specifications given in tables 2 and 3 of ANSI
Standard Z91.1-1972
for No. 1 and No. 2 fuel oil. Measure the higher heating value of the
test fuel with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3.5 Electrical supply. For auxiliary electric components of a
vented heater, maintain the electrical supply to the test unit within
one percent of the nameplate voltage for the entire test cycle. If a
voltage range is used for nameplate voltage, maintain the electrical
supply within one percent of the mid-point of the nameplate voltage
range.
2.4 Burner adjustments.
2.4.1 Gas burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of gas fueled
vented heaters to their maximum Btu ratings at the test pressure
specified in section 2.3 of this appendix. Correct the burner volumetric
flow rate to 60 [deg]F (15.6C) and 30 inches of mercury barometric
pressure, set the fuel flow rate to obtain a heat rate of within +-2
percent of the hourly Btu rating specified by the manufacturer as
measured after 15 minutes of operation starting with all parts of the
vented heater at room temperature. Set the primary air shutters in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to give a good flame
at this adjustment. Do not allow the deposit of carbon during any test
specified herein.
If a vent limiting means is provided on a gas pressure regulator,
have it in place during all tests.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls
to operate the heater at the maximum fuel input rate. Set the thermostat
control to the maximum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety
control valve to the ``on'' position. In order to prevent modulation of
the burner at maximum input, place the thermostat sensing element in a
temperature control bath which is held at a temperature below the
maximum set point temperature of the control.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls
to operate the heater at the reduced fuel input rate. Set the thermostat
control to the minimum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety
control valve to the ``on'' position. If ambient test room temperature
is above the lowest control set point temperature, initiate burner
operation by placing the thermostat sensing element in a temperature
control bath that is held at a temperature below the minimum set point
temperature of the control.
2.4.2 Oil burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of oil fueled
vented heaters to give the CO2 reading recommended by the
manufacturer and an hourly Btu input, during the steady-state
performance test described below, which is within +-2 percent of the
heater manufacturer's specified normal hourly Btu input rating. On units
employing a power burner do not allow smoke in the flue to exceed a No.
1 smoke during the steady-state performance test as measured by the
procedure in ANSI Standard Z11.182-1965 (R1971) (ASTM D 2156-65 (1970)).
If, on units employing a power burner, the smoke in the flue exceeds a
No. 1 smoke during the steady-state test, readjust the burner to give a
lower smoke reading, and, if necessary a lower CO2 reading,
and start all tests over. Maintain the average draft over the fire and
in the flue during the steady-state performance test at that recommended
by the manufacturer within +-0.005 inches of water gauge. Do not make
additional adjustments to the burner during the required series of
performance tests. The instruments and measuring apparatus for this test
are described in section 6.3 of ANSI standard Z91.1-1972.
2.5 Circulating air adjustments.
2.5.1 Forced air vented wall furnaces (including direct vent
systems). During tests maintain the air flow through the heater as
specified by the manufacturer and operate the vented heater with the
outlet air temperature between 80 [deg]F and 130 [deg]F above room
temperature. If adjustable air discharge registers are provided, adjust
them so as to provide the maximum possible air restriction. Measure air
discharge temperature as specified in section 2.14 of ANSI Z21.49-1975.
2.5.2 Fan type vented room heaters and floor furnaces. During tests
on fan type furnaces and heaters, adjust the air flow through the heater
as specified by the manufacturer. If adjustable air discharge registers
are provided, adjust them to provide the maximum possible air
restriction.
2.6 Location of temperature measuring instrumentation.
2.6.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct
vent systems). For units
[[Page 246]]
employing an integral draft diverter, install nine thermocouples, wired
in parallel, in a horizontal plane in the five foot test stack located
one foot from the test stack inlet. Equalize the length of all
thermocouple leads before paralleling. Locate one thermocouple in the
center of the stack. Locate eight thermocouples along imaginary lines
intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points one
third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the stack and
the stack wall.
For units which employ a direct vent system, locate at least one
thermocouple at the center of each flue way exiting the heat exchanger.
Provide radiation shields if the thermocouples are exposed to burner
radiation.
For units which employ a draft hood or units which employ a direct
vent system which does not significantly preheat the incoming combustion
air, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a horizontal
plane located within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the heater outlet and
upstream of the draft hood on units so equipped. Locate one thermocouple
in the center of the pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines
intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points one
third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and
the pipe wall.
For units which employ direct vent systems that significantly
preheat the incoming combustion air, install nine thermocouples, wired
in parallel, in a plane parallel to and located within 6 inches (152.4
mm) of the vent/air intake terminal. Equalize the length of all
thermocouple leads before paralleling. Locate one thermocouple in the
center of the vent pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines
intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and two
thirds of the distance between the center of the flue pipe and the pipe
wall.
Use bead-type thermocouples having wire size not greater than No. 24
American Wire Gauge (AWG). If there is a possibility that the
thermocouples could receive direct radiation from the fire, install
radiation shields on the fire side of the thermocouples only and
position the shields so that they do not touch the thermocouple
junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring conditioned warm air temperature
as described in ANSI Z21.49-1975, section 2.14. Establish the
temperature of the inlet air by means of single No. 24 AWG bead-type
thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and located in the
center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.6.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct
vent systems). Install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel and having
equal length leads, in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the flue
pipe. Locate this plane at the position shown in Figure 34.4 of UL 730-
1974, or Figures 35.1 and 35.2 of UL 729-1976 for a single thermocouple,
except that on direct vent systems which significantly preheat the
incoming combustion air, it shall be located within 6 inches (152.5 mm)
of the outlet of the vent/air intake terminal. Locate one thermocouple
in the center of the flue pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary
lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and
two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and pipe wall.
Use bead-type thermocouples having a wire size not greater than No.
24 AWG. If there is a possibility that the thermocouples could receive
direct radiation from the fire, install radiation shields on the fire
side of the thermocouples only and position the shields so that they do
not touch the thermocouple junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring the conditioned warm air
temperature as described in sections 35.12 through 35.17 of UL 730-1974.
Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of a single No. 24
AWG bead-type thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and
located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.7 Combustion measurement instrumentation. Analyze the samples of
stack and flue gases for vented heaters to determine the concentration
by volume of carbon dioxide present in the dry gas with instrumentation
which will result in a reading having an accuracy of +-0.1 percentage
points.
2.8 Energy flow instrumentation. Install one or more instruments,
which measure the rate of gas flow or fuel oil supplied to the vented
heater, and if appropriate, the electrical energy with an error no
greater than one percent.
2.9 Room ambient temperature. During the time period required to
pe